annotate etc/NEWS @ 28285:c54d62415e91

Changed the type of parameter passed to the function defined by `quickurl-format-function'. Before only the text of the URL was passed. Now the whole URL structure is passed and the function is responsible for extracting the parts it requires. Changed the default of `quickurl-format-function' accordingly. (quickurl-insert): Changed the `funcall' of `quickurl-format-function' to match the above change. (quickurl-list-insert): Changed the `url' case so that it makes use of `quickurl-format-function', previous to this the format was hard wired.
author Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
date Thu, 23 Mar 2000 13:53:14 +0000
parents 0a2dc2be3dd4
children 156a858432c4
Ignore whitespace changes - Everywhere: Within whitespace: At end of lines:
rev   line source
27200
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
1 GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 5 Jan 2000
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
2 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3 See the end for copying conditions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5 Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6 For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
8
25995
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
9 * Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
0c93f1c6603a Note --with-pop change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25992
diff changeset
10
28166
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
11 ** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
12 the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
13
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
14 ** There are new configure options associated with the support for
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
15 images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option to list them.
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
16
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
17 * Changes in Emacs 21.1
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
18
28159
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
19 ** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
20 compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
21 this behavior.
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
22
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
23 The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
24 compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
25 Emacs dump core.
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
26
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
27 ** New X resources recognized
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
28
28140
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
29 *** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
30 whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
31 is useful for debugging X problems.
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
32
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
33 Example:
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
34
28159
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
35 emacs.synchronous: true
28140
343d3197bdea *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28132
diff changeset
36
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
37 *** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
38 visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
39 the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
40 and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
41 visual class names are
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
42
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
43 TrueColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
44 PseudoColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
45 DirectColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
46 StaticColor
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
47 GrayScale
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
48 StaticGray
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
49
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
50 Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
51 `pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
52 meaning.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
53
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
54 The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
55 supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
56 `visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
57 visual.
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
58
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
59 Example:
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
60
28159
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
61 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
27994
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
62
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
63 *** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
64 specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
65 default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
66 resource values are `true' or `on'.
0ef07a7894e2 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27966
diff changeset
67
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
68 Example:
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
69
28159
20862b49300f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28149
diff changeset
70 emacs.privateColormap: true
27995
82c488f26a07 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27994
diff changeset
71
27966
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
72 ** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
73 more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
74 now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
b8b910003631 Mention the new menu-bar structure.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27881
diff changeset
75
27847
dac12996b1b5 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27845
diff changeset
76 ** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
27845
995881918154 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27827
diff changeset
77 display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
27847
dac12996b1b5 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27845
diff changeset
78 shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
dac12996b1b5 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27845
diff changeset
79 be customized.
27845
995881918154 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27827
diff changeset
80
27770
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
81 ** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
82
27473
2c8128604a57 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27470
diff changeset
83 ** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
2c8128604a57 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27470
diff changeset
84 all frames except the selected one.
2c8128604a57 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27470
diff changeset
85
27369
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
86 ** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
87 to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
88
27356
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
89 ** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
90 the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X either in the echo
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
91 area or with tooltips.
6a78e514e6d3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27328
diff changeset
92
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
93 ** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
94 read mail from the menu etc.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
95
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
96 ** Changes in Outline mode.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
97
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
98 There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
99 `outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
100 the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
101
27200
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
102 ** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
103 groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
104
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
105 ** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either M-x clone-buffer
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
106 or C-u m <entry> RET. M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
107 several other special buffers.
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
108
26432
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
109 ** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
110 under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
111 .emacs file.
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
112
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
113 The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
114 determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
23b09a47da5c added entry about mwheel.el
William M. Perry <wmperry@aventail.com>
parents: 26417
diff changeset
115
26417
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
116 ** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
117 abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
118 `directory-abbrev-alist'.
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
119
26322
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
120 ** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
121 is running in batch mode. For example,
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
122
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
123 (message "%s" (read t))
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
124
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
125 will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
126 to standard output.
9d7f261d1841 Reading from mini-buffer reads from stdin if noninteractive.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26306
diff changeset
127
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
128 ** Faces and frame parameters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
130 There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
131 Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
132 `scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
133 `scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
134 sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
135 for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
136 parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
137
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
138 Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
139 `default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
140 `foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
141 `default' face and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
142
25951
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
143 ** New face `menu'.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
144
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
145 The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
146 Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
147 attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
b3f0ced6423b Add entry for face `menu'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25949
diff changeset
148
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
149 ** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
151 The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
152 colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
153 correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
154 the screen gamma of a frame's display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
155
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
156 PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
157 in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
158 color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
159
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
160 The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
161 `ScreenGamma'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
162
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
163 ** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
164
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
165 The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
166 Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
167 oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
168 of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
169 the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
171 ** Emacs has a new face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
173 The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
174 font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
175 height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
176 These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
177 specify a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
178
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
179 Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
180 These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
181 under Lisp changes, below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
183 ** New default font is Courier 12pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
185 ** When using a windowing terminal, Emacs window now has a cursor of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
186 its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid; otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
187 it is hollow.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
188
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
189 ** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
190 truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
191 foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
192 customizing face `fringe'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
194 ** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
195 can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
196
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
197 ** LessTif support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
198
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
199 Emacs now runs with LessTif (see <http://www.lesstif.org>). You will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
200 need a version 0.88.1 or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
202 ** Toolkit scroll bars.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
203
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
204 Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
205 LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
206 configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
207 bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
208 bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
209 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
211 When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
212 Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
213 Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
214 Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
215 define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
216 `s/freebsd.h' as an example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
218 Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
219 a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
220 directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
221 different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
222 system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
223 add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
225 The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
226 `float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
227 This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
228 image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
229 Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
230
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
231 ** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
233 When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
234 widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
235 Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
237 ** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
239 When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
240 whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
241 defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
242 highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
243 displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
244 whitespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
246 ** Busy-cursor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
248 Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
249 display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
250
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
251 ** Blinking cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
253 M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
254 terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
255 and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
256 the group `cursor'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
258 ** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
260 This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
261 generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
262 See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
263 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
265 Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
266 have to do anything to activate it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
267
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
268 ** Tabs and variable-width text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
269
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
270 Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
271 defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
272 independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
273 Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
275 ** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
277 *** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
279 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
281 The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
282 one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
283
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
284 *** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, like in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
285 Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
286
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
287 ** Hscrolling in C code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
289 Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
291 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
293 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
294 how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
295
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
296 ** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
298 Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
299 mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
300 line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
301 about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
302 in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
303
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
304 Currently, the following actions have been defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
306 - Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
307 buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
309 - Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
310 M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
312 - Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
313
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
314 - Mouse-2 on the read-only status in the mode line (`%' or `*')
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
315 toggles the read-only status.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
316
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
317 - Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
319 ** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
321 When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
26652
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
322 from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
323 non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
325 ** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
327 Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
328 Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
329 the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
330 italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
331 Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
332 attributes like overlines, strike-throught, box are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
333
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
334 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
336 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
337 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
338 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
339 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
340 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
342 ** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
343 the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
344 forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
345 value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
346 users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
347 even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
348
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
349 The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
350
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
351 ** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
352
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
353 As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
354 drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
355 `x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
356
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
357 ** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
358 bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
360 This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
361 `indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
362 variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
364 ** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
366 When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
367 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
368 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
369 fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
371 When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
372 value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
373 number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
374 fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
376 ** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
377 notably at the end of lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
379 All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
380 spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
381
28132
2a26c31d59c5 replace-rectangle, autoconf.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 28098
diff changeset
382 There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
2a26c31d59c5 replace-rectangle, autoconf.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 28098
diff changeset
383
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
384 ** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
385 query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
386 after each match to get the replacement text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
388 ** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
390 If a message is longer than one line, or mini-buffer contents are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
391 longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the mini-window unless it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
392 on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum mini-window size
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
393 by setting the following variable:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
395 - User option: max-mini-window-height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
397 Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
398 fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
399 specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
401 Default is 0.25.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
402
27017
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
403 ** Changes to hideshow.el
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
404
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
405 Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
406 selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
407
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
408 *** Generalized block selection and traversal
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
409
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
410 A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
411 (both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
412 which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
413 `forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
414 point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
415 (which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
416
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
417 If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
418 i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
419 backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
420 the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
421
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
422 *** Isearch support for updating mode line
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
423
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
424 During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
425 blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
426 line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
427 portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
428 is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
429
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
430 To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
431 something like this in your .emacs.
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
432
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
433 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
434 (lambda ()
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
435 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
78e14b5e988c Hideshow changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27016
diff changeset
436
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
437 ** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
438
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
439 If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
440 entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
441 log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
442
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
443 New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
444 buffer, fixing old-style date formats if necessary.
27005
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
445
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
446 Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
447 if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
448
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
449 The search for a file's version number is performed based on regular
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
450 expressions from `change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
451 cutomized. Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
452 a file.
e9167a5cfad2 Alto's change to add-log.el.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26964
diff changeset
453
26964
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
454 ** Changes in Font Lock
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
455
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
456 *** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
457 font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
458 mode.
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
459
26606
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
460 ** Comint (subshell) changes
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
461
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
462 Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
463 and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
464
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
465 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
466 buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
467 buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
468
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
469 The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
470 M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
471 the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
12a1dfb72160 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26541
diff changeset
472
26835
44fd08970a49 RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26834
diff changeset
473 ** Changes to Rmail mode
44fd08970a49 RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26834
diff changeset
474
27361
c050e4500d16 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27356
diff changeset
475 *** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
c050e4500d16 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27356
diff changeset
476 like `j'.
c050e4500d16 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27356
diff changeset
477
27381
622e861dce48 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27378
diff changeset
478 *** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
622e861dce48 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27378
diff changeset
479 specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
27378
af3075bcc264 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27369
diff changeset
480 digest message.
26835
44fd08970a49 RET bound in Rmail summary.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26834
diff changeset
481
26271
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
482 ** Changes to TeX mode
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
483
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
484 The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
485 `latex-mode'.
b47b74998eef *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26264
diff changeset
486
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
487 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
488
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
489 *** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
490 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
491 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
492 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
493 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
494 can be edited from that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
496 *** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
497 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
498 `A' to use all marked entries).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
500 *** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
501 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
503 *** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
504 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
505 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
506 been cited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
507
26684
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
508 ** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
509 The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
510 semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
511 in column 1 are always made leaves.
5ffc1f61b1d4 Add description of changed outline-regexp/new outline-level for
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26652
diff changeset
512
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
513 ** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
514 has the following new features:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
515
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
516 *** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
517 may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
518 to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
519 time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
520
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
521 *** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
522 feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
523 file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
524 compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
525 pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
526 defaults to 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
528 ** Tooltips.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
530 Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
531 mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
532 can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
533
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
534 Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
535 variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
536 the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
537 tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
539 ** Customize changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
541 *** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
26096
466a2fb0133c Note about custom comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26062
diff changeset
542 `State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
466a2fb0133c Note about custom comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26062
diff changeset
543 cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
545 *** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
546 Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
547 default).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
548
26834
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
549 *** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
550 between custom options. Example:
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
551
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
552 (defcustom default-input-method nil
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
553 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
554 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
555 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
556 :group 'mule
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
557 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
558 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
559
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
560 This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
561 current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
562 first in a custom-set-variables statement.
782476a34d9d Custom option keyword :set-after.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26820
diff changeset
563
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
564 ** New features in evaluation commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
565
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
566 The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
567 modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
568 print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
569 customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
570 eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
572 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
574 *** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
575 command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
576 is, delete only empty directories.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
578 *** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
579 command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
580 copy directories recursively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
581
26728
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
582 *** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
583 in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
584 the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
585
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
586 ** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
587 use the -f option when sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
588
26820
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
589 ** CC mode changes.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
590
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
591 Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
592 current user setups (although it's believed that these
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
593 incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
594 However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
595 back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
596 compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
597 release.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
598
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
599 *** New initialization procedure for the style system.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
600 When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
601 variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
602 take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
603 is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
604 settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
605 possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
606 Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
607
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
608 By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
609 special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
610 the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
611 of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
612 above.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
613
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
614 Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
615 when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
616 function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
617 call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
618 then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
619 values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
620 only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
621 function documentation for more info.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
622
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
623 The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
624 especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
625 with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
626 intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
627 such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
628 is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
629 configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
630 global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
631
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
632 (Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
633
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
634 **** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
635 This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
636
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
637 This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
638 variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
639 completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
640 the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
641 empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
642 style system.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
643
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
644 **** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
645 In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
646 c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
647 as far as possible.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
648
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
649 *** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
650 CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
651 surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
652 chapter about this in the manual.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
653
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
654 **** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
655 The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
656 recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
657 primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
658 adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
659
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
660 **** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
661 This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
662 c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
663
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
664 **** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
665 This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
666
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
667 It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
668 Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
669 A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
670 inside CC Mode.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
671
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
672 Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
673 causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
674 the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
675 available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
676 cc-mode/).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
677
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
678 **** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
679 The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
680 specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
681 literals.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
682
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
683 **** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
684 It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
685 prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
686 you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
687 this function.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
688
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
689 *** Fixes to IDL mode.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
690 It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
691 to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
692 struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
693 Thanks to Eric Eide.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
694
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
695 *** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
696 It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
697 opening braces hangs and when they don't.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
698
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
699 **** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
700
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
701 *** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
702 See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
703 better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
704 and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
705
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
706 *** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
707 previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
708 the column specified by comment-column.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
709
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
710 *** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
711 In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
712 is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
713 prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
714 contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
715 don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
716
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
717 *** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
718 instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
719 arguments.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
720
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
721 *** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
722
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
723 *** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
724 c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
725 c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
726 variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
727 Provan).
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
728
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
729 *** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
b7d914dd51a6 cc-mode changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26786
diff changeset
730
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
731 ** Isearch changes
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
732
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
733 *** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
734 selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
735
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
736 *** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
737
26417
5678b244c3ac Changes in `list-buffers'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26407
diff changeset
738 Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
739 `isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
740 search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
741 before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
742 highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
743 `secondary-selection'.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
744
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
745 The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
746 will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
747 Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
748 using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
749 usual snappy response.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
750
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
751 If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
752 matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
753 set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
754 isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
755
27470
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
756 ** Changes in sort.el
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
757
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
758 The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
27533
6dfbe5197843 A typo ("ocatal" instead of "octal").
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27498
diff changeset
759 as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
27470
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
760 new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
483c021bf376 Change in sort-numeric-fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27387
diff changeset
761 numeric base.
26407
ef48fc763e7f Isearch lazy highlight
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26403
diff changeset
762
28194
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
763 ** Changes to Ange-ftp
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
764
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
765 *** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
25929
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
766 names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
767 sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
a955ea8f6b15 ange-ftp item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25910
diff changeset
768
28194
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
769 *** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
770 ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
771
25984
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
772 ** Shell script mode changes.
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
773
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
774 Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
775 derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
776 sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
eea178de35f5 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25951
diff changeset
777
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
778 ** Etags changes.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
779
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
780 *** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
781
26289
6651db4a4b1f Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26277
diff changeset
782 *** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
26292
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
783 possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
784 {lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
785 This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
786 a regular expression. The manual contains details.
26289
6651db4a4b1f Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26277
diff changeset
787
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
788 *** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
789 declarations when given the --declarations option.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
790
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
791 *** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
26289
6651db4a4b1f Document regexp changes in etags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26277
diff changeset
792 "operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
793
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
794 *** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
795 types.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
796
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
797 *** In Fortran, procedure is no more tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
798
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
799 *** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
800
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
801 *** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
802 are now tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
803
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
804 *** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
805 variables are tagged.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
806
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
807 *** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
808
26292
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
809 *** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
81cd0c225dd9 Last changes for etags (I hope).
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26289
diff changeset
810 for PSWrap.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
811
26728
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
812 ** Changes in etags.el
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
813
28244
0a2dc2be3dd4 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28194
diff changeset
814 *** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
0a2dc2be3dd4 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28194
diff changeset
815 tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
0a2dc2be3dd4 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28194
diff changeset
816 is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
0a2dc2be3dd4 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28194
diff changeset
817
26728
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
818 *** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
819 the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
820
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
821 If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
822 FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
823 TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
824 obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
825
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
826 TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
827
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
828 FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
829 List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
830
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
831 A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
832
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
833 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
834 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
835 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
836
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
837 *** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
838 of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
839
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
840 *** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
841 names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
8a531f428463 Etags.el change moved. Add dired-aux change.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26718
diff changeset
842
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
843 ** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
844 and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
845 LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
846
26016
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
847 ** New language environments `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
848 These correspond respectively to the ISO character sets 8859-14
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
849 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign). There is
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
850 currently no specific input method support for them.
e60cddba180c latin-[89]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25995
diff changeset
851
26652
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
852 ** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sqeuence-nos' to
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
853 remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
854 appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
855
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
856 ** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
857
26768
02eb997314dc view-emacs-problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26737
diff changeset
858 ** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
02eb997314dc view-emacs-problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26737
diff changeset
859
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
860 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
861
28098
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
862 *** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
863 authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
864
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
865 The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
866 the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
867 the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
868 Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
869 even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
870 single step.
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
871
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
872 On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
873 matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
874 probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
875 contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
2fc1959fa99d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28094
diff changeset
876
27644
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
877 *** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
878 unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
879 actually modifying content of a buffer.
1ac28043dbd6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27573
diff changeset
880
27498
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
881 *** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
882 PostScript.
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
883
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
884 Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
885
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
886 The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
887
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
888 ; comment (until end of line)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
889 A non-terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
890 "C" terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
891 ?C? special
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
892 $A default non-terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
893 $"C" default terminal
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
894 $?C? default special
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
895 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
896 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
897 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
898 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
899 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
900 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
901 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
902 C+ one or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
903 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
904 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
905 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
906 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
907 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
908 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
909 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
910
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
911 Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
960ea40c1a7e *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27475
diff changeset
912
27328
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
913 *** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
914 align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
915 determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
916 example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
917 equal signs of assignments.
7748234c70d7 align.el
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27307
diff changeset
918
27266
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
919 *** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
920 paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
8ce11c7a7fcb read-mail-command, outline mode changes, change-log-merge,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27200
diff changeset
921
27016
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
922 *** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
923 list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
924 buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
925 customize the package.
62cd5f1749cc *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27005
diff changeset
926
27733
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
927 *** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
928 replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
929 is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
930 and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
931 not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
932 which answers different needs.
d6a89b95b32d *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27714
diff changeset
933
26964
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
934 *** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
935 suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
936 expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
937 course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
938 reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
939 to be enabled.
2939daf50656 Font-lock changes by Anders Lindgren.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26933
diff changeset
940
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
941 *** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
942 containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
943
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
944 *** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
945
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
946 *** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
948 *** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
949
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
950 *** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
951 Pascal) language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
952
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
953 *** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
954 the text at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
956 *** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
957
25862
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
958 *** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
62b8ede0e424 Mention fortune.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 25853
diff changeset
959
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
960 *** whitespace.el ???
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
961
25992
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
962 *** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
963 files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
964 (very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
965 interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
966 often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
967 uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
968 codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
969
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
970 *** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
971
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
972 Here is an example of columns:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
973
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
974 horse apple bus
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
975 dog pineapple car EXTRA
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
976 porcupine strawberry airplane
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
977
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
978 Doing the following settings:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
979
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
980 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
981 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
982 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
983 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
984
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
985
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
986 Selecting the lines above and typing:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
987
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
988 M-x delimit-columns-region
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
989
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
990 It results:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
991
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
992 [ horse , apple , bus , ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
993 [ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
994 [ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
995
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
996 delim-col has the following options:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
997
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
998 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
999 before all columns.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1000
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1001 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1002 between each column.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1003
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1004 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1005 after all columns.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1006
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1007 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1008 each column.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1009
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1010 delim-col has the following commands:
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1011
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1012 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1013 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
8f40394739f2 Add sh-script changes.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25984
diff changeset
1014
26030
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1015 *** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1016 were operated on recently. When enabled, a new "Open Recent" submenu
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1017 is displayed in the "Files" menu.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1018
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1019 The recent files list is automatically saved across Emacs sessions.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1020
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1021 To enable/disable recentf use M-x recentf-mode.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1022
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1023 To enable recentf at Emacs startup use
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1024 M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1025
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1026 To change the number of recent files displayed and others options use
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1027 M-x customize-group RET recentf RET.
c5e8559a53cb Add description of recentf.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26016
diff changeset
1028
26149
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
1029 *** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
1030 text.
0a342d5afcc2 elide-head.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26144
diff changeset
1031
26924
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
1032 *** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
26786
d30b640777b8 footnote.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26768
diff changeset
1033 of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
d30b640777b8 footnote.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26768
diff changeset
1034 specific to Message mode.
d30b640777b8 footnote.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26768
diff changeset
1035
26924
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
1036 *** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
1037 viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
1038 with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
5348841810f6 Add diff-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26835
diff changeset
1039
27714
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1040 *** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1041 interface to access directory servers using different directory
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1042 protocols. It has a separate manual.
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1043
28132
2a26c31d59c5 replace-rectangle, autoconf.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 28098
diff changeset
1044 *** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
2a26c31d59c5 replace-rectangle, autoconf.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 28098
diff changeset
1045 for Autoconf, selected automatically.
2a26c31d59c5 replace-rectangle, autoconf.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 28098
diff changeset
1046
27714
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1047 *** windmove.el
22a581e00fe4 Mention some new packages, extra configure options.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27693
diff changeset
1048
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1049 ** Withdrawn packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1051 *** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1052 functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
26133
5eb182b0c724 eval-reg removed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26107
diff changeset
1053
27369
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
1054 *** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
1055
b7162d2b3d0b ph.el, user-init-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27361
diff changeset
1056 *** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1058 * Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1059
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1060 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1061 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1062 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1063 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1064
28194
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1065 ** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1066 specificationa in string form as accepted my `modify-syntax-entry' to
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1067 the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1068 text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1069
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1070 Example:
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1071
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1072 (string-to-syntax "()")
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1073 => (4 . 41)
59c09e95d278 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28166
diff changeset
1074
28166
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1075 ** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1076 other than 10.
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1077
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1078 *** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1079 INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1080
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1081 #b1111
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1082 => 15
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1083 #b-1111
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1084 => -15
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1085
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1086 *** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1087
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1088 #o666
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1089 => 438
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1090
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1091 *** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1092
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1093 #xbeef
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1094 => 48815
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1095
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1096 *** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1097
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1098 #2R-111
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1099 => -7
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1100 #25rah
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1101 => 267
f3ea89b2cc47 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28159
diff changeset
1102
28037
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1103 ** The function documentation-property now evaluates the value of
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1104 the given property to obtain a a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1105 and isn't a string.
acbd35afbe7b *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27995
diff changeset
1106
27881
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1107 +++
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1108 ** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1109
28149
fd72698178e7 *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 28140
diff changeset
1110 ** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
27881
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1111 for a regexp in a string.
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1112
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1113 ** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1114 `mouse-position-function'.
f54471f7b913 replace-regexps-in-string, mouse-position-function, define-key-after change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27847
diff changeset
1115
27827
25e4e0c9c19a *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27820
diff changeset
1116 ** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
25e4e0c9c19a *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27820
diff changeset
1117 that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
25e4e0c9c19a *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27820
diff changeset
1118
27820
2d9b98395c82 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27770
diff changeset
1119 ** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
2d9b98395c82 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27770
diff changeset
1120 Keywords are now always considered constants.
2d9b98395c82 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27770
diff changeset
1121
27770
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1122 +++
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1123 ** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1124 returns it.
38f6e392c0aa *** empty log message ***
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27733
diff changeset
1125
27276
61772f3ab92f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27266
diff changeset
1126 ** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
61772f3ab92f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27266
diff changeset
1127 returned by function `recent-keys'.
61772f3ab92f *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27266
diff changeset
1128
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1129 +++
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1130 ** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1131 can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1132 Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1133 etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1134 mode.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1135
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1136 +++
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1137 ** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1138 and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1139
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1140 +++
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1141 ** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1142 has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1143 function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1144 returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1145 been performed."
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1146
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1147 When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1148 and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1149 hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1150 then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1151
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1152 +++
26737
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1153 ** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1154 In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1155 and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
0aad3e0b47d2 Change of intern-soft.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26728
diff changeset
1156
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1157 +++
26467
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1158 ** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1159 with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1160 specified table.
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1161
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1162 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1163
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1164 Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
26541
ce6bf7b42bc7 --with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26525
diff changeset
1165 TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
ce6bf7b42bc7 --with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26525
diff changeset
1166 saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
ce6bf7b42bc7 --with-syntax-table changed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26525
diff changeset
1167 what BODY returns.
26467
fe1632dc5fb3 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26432
diff changeset
1168
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1169 +++
27693
d8bedafef8d5 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27644
diff changeset
1170 ** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
28063
f1b33463506d *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 28051
diff changeset
1171 Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
27094
6500fd0a7d8e *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 27092
diff changeset
1172
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1173 +++
26397
17d6fe2e2d0f Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26360
diff changeset
1174 ** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
17d6fe2e2d0f Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26360
diff changeset
1175 removed since it wasn't used by anything.
17d6fe2e2d0f Removal of buffer argument of file-local-copy.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26360
diff changeset
1176
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1177 +++
26360
5370b1c171ef Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26359
diff changeset
1178 ** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
5370b1c171ef Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26359
diff changeset
1179 instead of being optional.
5370b1c171ef Change in file-locked-p argument.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26359
diff changeset
1180
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1181 +++
26277
32e16b70ae15 New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26271
diff changeset
1182 ** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
32e16b70ae15 New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26271
diff changeset
1183 modify read-only text.
32e16b70ae15 New built-in error `text-read-only'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26271
diff changeset
1184
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1185 +++
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1186 ** New functions and variables for locales.
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1187
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1188 The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1189 decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
26525
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1190 time functions like strftime. The new variables
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1191 `system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1192 locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1193
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1194 The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1195 environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1196 the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
26525
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1197 environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1198 not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1199 `locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
4df5920724de Rename messages-locale to system-messages-locale
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26467
diff changeset
1200 `locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
26140
068f7ad41d40 Describe new functions and variables for locales.
Paul Eggert <eggert@twinsun.com>
parents: 26133
diff changeset
1201
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1202 +++
26107
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1203 ** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1204 To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1205 modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1206 start sequences.
5bdae485eb03 *** empty log message ***
Stefan Monnier <monnier@iro.umontreal.ca>
parents: 26096
diff changeset
1207
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1208 +++
25910
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
1209 ** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
1210 because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
918acea58309 Add section for change of pixmap-spec-p to bitmap-spec-p.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 25862
diff changeset
1211
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1212 +++
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1213 ** New function `propertize'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1215 The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1216 strings with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1218 - Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1219
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1220 Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1221 by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1222 PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1223 specified value of that property. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1225 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1227 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1228 ** push and pop macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1229
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1230 Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1231 are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1232 as the place that holds the list to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1234 (push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1235 (pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1236 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1237
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1238 ** New dolist and dotimes macros.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1239
27387
d0a7127b33e5 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27385
diff changeset
1240 Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
d0a7127b33e5 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27385
diff changeset
1241 are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
27385
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1242
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1243 (dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1244 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1245 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1246 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1247
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1248 (dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1249 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1250 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1251 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
f7b7fdb0f3f4 *** empty log message ***
Richard M. Stallman <rms@gnu.org>
parents: 27381
diff changeset
1252
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1253 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1254 ** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1255 as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1257 [:digit:] matches 0 through 9
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1258 [:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1259 [:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1260 [:blank:] matches space and tab only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1261 [:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1262 space, and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1263 [:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1264 and DEL.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1265 [:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1266 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1267 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1268 [:alpha:] matches letters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1269 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1270 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1271 [:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1272 [:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1273 [:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1274 [:punct:] matches punctuation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1275 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1276 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1277 [:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1278 [:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1279 [:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1281 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1282 ** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1283
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1284 The following functions are defined for hash tables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1286 - Function: make-hash-table ARGS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1288 The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1289 are optional. The following arguments are defined:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1291 :test TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1293 TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1294 Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1295 it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1297 :size SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1298
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1299 SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1300 many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1302 :rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1303
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1304 REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1305 full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1306 size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1307 1.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1308 old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1310 :rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1312 THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1313 hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1314 (size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1316 :weakness WEAK
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1318 WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value', or t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1319 Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage collection if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1320 their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere outside of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1321 hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1322
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1323 - Function: makehash &optional TEST
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1325 Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1327 - Function: hash-table-p TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1329 Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1331 - Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1333 Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1334 values are shared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1336 - Function: hash-table-count TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1338 Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1339
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1340 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1342 Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1344 - Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1346 Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1348 - Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1350 Returns the size of TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1351
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1352 - Function: hash-table-rehash-test TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1353
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1354 Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1355
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1356 - Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1358 Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1359
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1360 - Function: clrhash TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1361
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1362 Clear TABLE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1364 - Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1366 Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1367 not found.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1368
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1369 - Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1371 Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1372 another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1374 - Function: remhash KEY TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1376 Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1378 - Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1379
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1380 Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1381 arguments KEY and VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1383 - Function: sxhash OBJ
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1385 Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1386
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1387 - Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1389 Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1390 a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1391 comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1392 and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1393 of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1395 TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1397 HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1398 code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1399 integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1401 Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1402 be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1403
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1404 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1405 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1406
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1407 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1408 (sxhash (upcase a)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1409
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1410 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1411 'case-fold-string-hash))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1413 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1414
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1415 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1416 ** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1418 It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1419 circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1420 a cons cell which is its own cdr.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1422 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1423 ** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1425 If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1426 #N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1428 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1429 ** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1430 t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1431 specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1432 is too short to reach that column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1434 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1435 ** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1436 now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1437 after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1438 two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1439
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1440 If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1441 perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1442 and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1443
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1444 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1445 ** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1446 to specify which buffer to return the size of.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1448 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1449 ** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1450 calendar-move-hook after moving point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1452 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1453 ** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1454 directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1455 small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1456 small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1457 temporary-file-directory instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1459 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1460 ** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1461 the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1462 `before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1463 hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1465 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1466 ** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1467 elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1469 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1470 ** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1472 make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1473 creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1474 ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1476 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1477 ** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1479 The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1480 on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1481 is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1482 never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1483 ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1484 overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1486 If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1487 that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1488 to get an error if the file exists at that time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1489 The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1490
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1491 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1492 ** Function `format' now handles text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1494 Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1495 If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1496 ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1497 result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1499 Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1500 string where arguments appear in the result string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1502 Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1503
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1504 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1505 (s2 "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1506 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1507 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1508 (format s1 s2))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1510 results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1511
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1512 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1513 ** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1515 Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1516 The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1517 argument in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1519 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1520 (arg "world"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1521 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1522 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1523 (message msg arg))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1525 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1526 ** Sound support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1528 Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1529 (Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1531 Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1532 (*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1533 to enable sound support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1535 Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1536 list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1537 when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1538 functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1539 sound to play, before playing the sound.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1541 The following sound properties are supported:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1542
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1543 - `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1545 FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1546 searched relative to `data-directory'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1547
27148
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1548 - `:data DATA'
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1549
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1550 DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1551 may be present, but not both.
929f111a6823 Sound with :data.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27145
diff changeset
1552
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1553 - `:volume VOLUME'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1555 VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1556 0..1. This property is optional.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1558 Other properties are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1560 ** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
26933
73340d009a9f keywordp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26924
diff changeset
1561
73340d009a9f keywordp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26924
diff changeset
1562 ** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
73340d009a9f keywordp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26924
diff changeset
1563 a keyword symbol.
27145
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1564
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1565 ** Changes to garbage collection
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1566
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1567 *** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1568 of live and free strings.
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1569
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1570 *** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1571 strings that have been consed so far.
01abacc81cce Changes to garbage-collect, new var strings-consed,
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27144
diff changeset
1572
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1574 * New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1575
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1576 Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1577 --- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1578 When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1579 so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1581 ** New face implementation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1583 Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1584 font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1586 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1587 *** New faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1588
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1589 Each face can specify the following display attributes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1590
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1591 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1592
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1593 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1594 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1595
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1596 3. Font height in 1/10pt
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1597
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1598 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1599
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1600 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1601
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1602 6. Foreground color.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1603
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1604 7. Background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1606 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1608 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1609
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1610 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1611
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1612 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1614 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1615 color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1617 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1618 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1620 Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1621 same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1622 frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1623 faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1624 with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1625 attributes mentioned above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1626
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1627 There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1628 definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1629 created frames.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1630
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1631 A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1632 have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1633 `fully-specified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1634
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1635 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1636 *** Face merging.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1638 The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1639 combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1640 aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1641 properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1642 that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1643 results in a fully-specified face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1645 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1646 *** Face realization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1647
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1648 After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1649 merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1650 realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1651 available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1652 face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1653 cache of the frame on which it was realized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1654
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1655 Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1656 character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1657 for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1658 charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1660 Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1661 specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1662 being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1663 the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1664 statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1665
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1666 In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1667 `char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1668 0x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1669 the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1670 initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1671 Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1673 Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1674 `enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1675 registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1676 with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1678 ++++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1679 **** Clearing face caches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1681 The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1682 on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1683 unused fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1685 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1686 *** Font selection.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1687
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1688 Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1689 given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1690 for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1691
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1692 If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1693 pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1694 family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1695 property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1696 an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1698 Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1699 against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1700 match for the given face attributes in this font list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1702 Font selection can be influenced by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1704 The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1705 attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1706 face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1707 names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1708 that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1709 width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1710 to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1711
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1712 Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1713 specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1714 face doesn't exist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1716 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1717 **** Scalable fonts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1719 Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1720 since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1721 servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1722
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1723 To enable scalable font use, set the variable
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
1724 `scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1725 scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1726 Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1727 scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1728 that list. Example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1730 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1731
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1732 allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1734 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1735 *** Functions and variables related to font selection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1736
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1737 - Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1738
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1739 Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1740 is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1741 string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1743 If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1744 the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1745 FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1746 POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1747 SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1748 These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1749 if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1750 REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1751 the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1752 of the face font sort order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1753
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1754 - Function: x-font-family-list
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1756 Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1757 omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1758 (FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1759 non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1761 - Variable: font-list-limit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1763 Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1764 won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1765 matching font. The default is currently 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1767 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1768 *** Setting face attributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1769
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1770 For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1771 with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1772 implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1773 `face-attribute'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1775 Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1776 symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1777
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1778 The following attributes are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1780 `:family'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1781
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1782 VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1783 or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1784 and `?' are allowed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1786 `:width'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1788 VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1789 It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1790 `condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1791 `extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1792
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1793 `:height'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1794
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1795 VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1796 1/10 pt.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1797
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1798 `:weight'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1800 VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1801 symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1802 `semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1804 `:slant'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1805
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1806 VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1807 symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1808 `reverse-oblique'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1810 `:foreground', `:background'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1811
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1812 VALUE must be a color name, a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1813
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1814 `:underline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1815
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1816 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1817 VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1818 a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1819 don't underline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1820
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1821 `:overline'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1823 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1824 VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1825 string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1826 overline.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1827
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1828 `:strike-through'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1830 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1831 striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1832 face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1833 is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1835 `:box'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1836
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1837 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1838 around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1839 VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1840 of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1841 and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1842 VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1843 :color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1844 the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1845 specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1846 defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1847 the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1848 color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1849 should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1850 like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1851 that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1852 the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1853 box.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1854
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1855 `:inverse-video'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1856
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1857 VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1858 inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1860 `:stipple'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1861
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1862 If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1863 The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1864 searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1865 HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1866 is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1867 explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1868
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1869 For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1870 and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1872 `:font'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1874 Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1875 XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1876 is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1877 versions of Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1879 For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1880 be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1881 must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1883 Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1884 `defface'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1886 *** Face attributes and X resources
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1888 The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1889 from X resources:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1890
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1891 Face attribute X resource class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1892 -----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1893 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1894 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1895 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1896 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1897 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1898 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1899 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1900 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1901 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1902 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1903 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1904 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1905 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
1906 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1907 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1908 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1909 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1910 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1911 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1913 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1914 *** Text property `face'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1915
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1916 The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1917 specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1918 specification can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1920 1. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1922 2. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1923 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1924 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1925 for face attribute names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1926
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1927 3. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1928 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1929 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1930
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1931 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1932 ** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1933
27092
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1934 The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1935 on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1936 the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1937 default. You can get defined colors with a call to
27092
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1938 `defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1939 used to clear the mapping table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1940
27092
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1941 ** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1942
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1943 The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1944 and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1945 type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1946 color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1947 display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1948 old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1949 `x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1950 compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1951 should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1952 modify their color-related behavior.
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1953
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1954 The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1955 any frame type.
60f5b0f50db9 Document the unified frame-independent support for colors and faces.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27076
diff changeset
1956
27573
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1957 ** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1958
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1959 The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1960 `display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1961 `display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1962 `display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1963 `display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1964 `display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1965 display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1966 the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1967 platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
32f4457e5501 Document functions which return display capabilities.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27533
diff changeset
1968
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1969 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1970 ** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1971
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1972 This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1974 The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1975 end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1976 Otherwise, it returns zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1977
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1978 ** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1979
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1980 There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1981 buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1982 text-property.
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1983
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1984 Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1985 forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1986 to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1987 not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
27144
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1988 commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1989 boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1990 `inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
46becbc67703 inhibit-field-text-motion
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27136
diff changeset
1991 functions.
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1992
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1993 Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1994 a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
26062
fd35581d53c1 Add Miles Bader's description of fields.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26034
diff changeset
1995 editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
1996
26300
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1997 The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1998
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
1999 - Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2000
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2001 Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2002 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2003 If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2004 constrained position if that is is different.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2005
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2006 If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2007 positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2008 ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2009 constrained to the field that has the same `field' text-property
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2010 as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2011 is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2012 fields.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2013
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2014 If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2015 NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2016 unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2017 C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2018 only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2019
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2020 - Function: erase-field &optional POS
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2021
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2022 Erases the field surrounding POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2023 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2024 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2025
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2026 - Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2027
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2028 Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2029 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2030 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2031 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at beginning of an
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2032 field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2033
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2034 - Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2035
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2036 Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2037 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2038 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2039 If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is already at end of a field,
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2040 then the end of the *following* field is returned.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2041
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2042 - Function: field-string &optional POS
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2043
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2044 Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2045 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2046 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2047
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2048 - Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2049
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2050 Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2051 A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2052 If POS is nil, the position of the current buffer's point is used.
25356c16306f Expanded description of `field' property from Miles Bader.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26292
diff changeset
2053
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2054 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2055 ** Image support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2056
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2057 Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2058 strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2059 (AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2060 replaces the display of the characters having that property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2061
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2062 If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2063 `(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2064 AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2065 window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2066 area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2068 IMAGE is an image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2070 *** Image specifications
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2072 Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2073 is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2074 specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
26403
03830fdf5186 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26397
diff changeset
2075 symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
03830fdf5186 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26397
diff changeset
2076 described below are ignored.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2078 The following is a list of properties all image types share.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2080 `:ascent ASCENT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2082 ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, and specifies the percentage
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2083 of the image's height to use for its ascent. Default is 50.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2084
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2085 `:margin MARGIN'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2086
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2087 MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2088 margin around the image. Default is 0.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2090 `:relief RELIEF'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2092 RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2093 around an image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2095 `:algorithm ALGO'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2096
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2097 Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2098 be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2099 supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2100 which is intended to display images "disabled."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2102 `:heuristic-mask BG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2103
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2104 If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2105 background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2106 determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2107 corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2108 the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2109 be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2110 background of the image.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2111
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2112 `:file FILE'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2114 Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2115 search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2116 building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2117 may be present in the image specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2118
27076
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2119 `:data DATA'
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2120
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2121 Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2122 supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2123 present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2124 support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2125
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2126 *** Supported image types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2127
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
2128 **** XBM, image type `xbm'.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2130 XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2131 properties supported are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2133 `:foreground FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2135 FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2136 is the frame's foreground.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2137
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2138 `:background FG'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2139
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2140 BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2141 the frame's background color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2143 XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2144 case, the image specification must contain the following properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2145 instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2147 `:width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2149 WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2151 `:height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2153 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2155 `:data DATA'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2156
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2157 DATA must be either
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2159 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2160 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2162 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2164 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2165 bitmap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2166
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2167 **** XPM, image type `xpm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2168
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2169 XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2170 `xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2171 found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2172 `--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2174 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2176 `:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2178 SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2179 name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2180 name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2181
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2182 XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2183 add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2185 The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2186 to display compressed images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2188 **** PBM, image type `pbm'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2190 PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2191 mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2192 defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2194 **** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2196 Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
27055
f43dabd831f2 Support :data for JPEG.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27045
diff changeset
2197 package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
f43dabd831f2 Support :data for JPEG.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27045
diff changeset
2198 are:
f43dabd831f2 Support :data for JPEG.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27045
diff changeset
2199
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2200 **** TIFF, image type `tiff'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2201
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2202 Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2203 package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2204 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2205
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2206 **** GIF, image type `gif'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2208 Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2209 `libungif-4.1.0', or later.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2210
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2211 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2213 `:index INDEX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2215 INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2216 multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2218 This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2219 For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2220 at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2221 every 0.1 seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2223 (defun show-anim (file max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2224 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2225 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2227 (defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2228 (when (= idx max)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2229 (setq idx 0))
27076
40c18bc759e9 Change description of :data for images.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27055
diff changeset
2230 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2231 (save-excursion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2232 (set-buffer buffer)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2233 (goto-char (point-min))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2234 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2235 (insert-image img "x"))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2236 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2238 **** PNG, image type `png'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2239
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2240 Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2241 package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2242 properties defined.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2244 **** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2245
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2246 Additional image properties supported are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2248 `:pt-width WIDTH'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2250 WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
2251 integer. This is a required property.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2253 `:pt-height HEIGHT'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2255 HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
26034
e7b463705814 Some typos fixed.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26030
diff changeset
2256 must be a integer. This is an required property.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2258 `:bounding-box BOX'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2260 BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2261 the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2262 files. This is an required property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2263
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2264 Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2265 lisp/gs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2267 *** Lisp interface.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2268
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2269 The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2270 which are supported in the current configuration.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2271
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2272 Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2273 they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2274 The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2275 manually.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2277 *** Simplified image API, image.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2278
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2279 The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2280 creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2281 can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2282 define an image based on available image types. The functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2283 `put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2284 buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2286 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2287 ** Display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2289 Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2290 and images.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2292 To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2293 `left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2294 `set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2295 obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2296 `right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2297 the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2298 of the display margins.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2300 You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2301 containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2302 one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2303 string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2304 in this file).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2305
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2306 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2307 ** Help display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2309 Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2310 moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2311 `help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2312 that have a `help-echo' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2314 The value of the `help-echo' property must be a string. For tool-bar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2315 items, their key definition is used to determine the help to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2316 If their definition contains a property `:help FORM', FORM is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2317 evaluated to determine the help string. Otherwise, the caption of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2318 tool-bar item is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2319
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2320 The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2321 help differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window causes the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2322 help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2324 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2325 ** Vertical fractional scrolling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2327 The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2328 This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2329
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2330 The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2331 scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2332 The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2333 scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2334 used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2335
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2336 (global-set-key [A-down]
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2337 #'(lambda ()
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2338 (interactive)
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2339 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2340 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2341 (global-set-key [A-up]
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2342 #'(lambda ()
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2343 (interactive)
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2344 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2345 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2347 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2348 ** New hook `fontification-functions'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2350 Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2351 when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2352 variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2353 is called with one argument, POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2354
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2355 At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2356 characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2357 as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2358 property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2359 `fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2361 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2362 ** Tool bar support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2364 Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2365 parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2366 controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2367 suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2368 `auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2369 automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2371 *** Tool bar item definitions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2373 Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2374 `tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2375 where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2376
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2377 CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2378 evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2379 the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2380 property (see below).
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2381
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2382 BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2383 binding are currently ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2385 The following properties are recognized:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2386
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2387 `:enable FORM'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2388
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2389 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2390 or disabled.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2391
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2392 `:visible FORM'
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2393
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2394 FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2395
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2396 `:filter FUNCTION'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2398 FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2399 FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2400 used instead of BINDING to display this item.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2401
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2402 `:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2403
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2404 TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2405 and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2406
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2407 `:image IMAGES'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2408
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2409 IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2410 image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2411 meaning of each of the four elements:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2412
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2413 Index Use when item is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2414 ----------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2415 0 enabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2416 1 enabled and deselected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2417 2 disabled and selected
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2418 3 disabled and deselected
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2419
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2420 `:help HELP-STRING'.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2421
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2422 Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2423 is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2425 *** Tool-bar-related variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2427 If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2428 resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2429 than 1/4 of the frame's size.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2430
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2431 If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2432 raised when the mouse moves over them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2434 You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2435 `tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2436 pixels. Default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2438 You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2439 `tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2440
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2441 *** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2443 You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2444 a tool bar item. If
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2445
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2446 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2447 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2448 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2450 is the original tool bar item definition, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2451
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2452 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2453
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2454 makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2455 item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2456
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2457 ** Mode line changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2459 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2460 *** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2461
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2462 The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2463 that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2464 a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2465
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2466 1. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2467 a `local-map' text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2468
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2469 2. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2470 that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2472 3. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2473 is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2474 `local-map' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2476 The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2477 properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2478 example.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2479
26359
d2970b5d3b72 Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26322
diff changeset
2480 *** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
d2970b5d3b72 Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26322
diff changeset
2481 evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
d2970b5d3b72 Add mode line element '(:eval FORM)'.
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 26322
diff changeset
2482
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2483 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2484 *** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2485 variable mode-line-format to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2487 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2488 *** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2489
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2490 This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2491 `header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2492 completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2493 `default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2494 line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2496 The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2497 `header-line'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2499 The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2500 position in the header-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2502 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2503 ** Text property `display'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2505 The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2506 also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2507 `display' property should be a display specification, as described
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2508 below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2510 *** Variable width and height spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2511
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2512 To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2513 specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2514 `(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2515 area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2516 marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2517 displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2518 simpler form STRETCH as property value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2520 The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2521 PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2522 properties described below.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2523
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2524 The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2525 characters having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2527 - :width WIDTH
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2529 Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2530 character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2532 - :relative-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2533
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2534 Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2535 first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2536 same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2537 width of that character by FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2539 - :align-to HPOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2541 Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2542 value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2544 Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2545
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2546 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2548 Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2549 normal line height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2550
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2551 - :relative-height FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2553 The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2554 of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2556 - :ascent ASCENT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2558 Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2559 used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2560 baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2561 equal to 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2562
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2563 You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2565 *** Images
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2567 A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2568 . IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2569 in the display, the characters having this display specification in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2570 their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2571 the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2572 `(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2573 area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2574 the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2575 as display specification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2577 *** Other display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2579 - :space-width FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2581 Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2582 should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2583 integer or float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2584
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2585 - :height HEIGHT
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2586
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2587 Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2588
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2589 If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2590 means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2591 the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2592 ``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2593 a font is available counts as a step.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2594
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2595 If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2596 as tall as the frame's default font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2598 If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2599 height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2600
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2601 Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2602 `height' bound to the current specified font height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2604 - :raise FACTOR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2606 FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2607 font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2608 raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2609 amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2610 `:height' subproperty.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2611
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2612 *** Conditional display properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2614 All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2615 has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2616 applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2617 During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2618 the text having the `display' property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2619
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2620 The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2621 `(:when t SPEC)'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2622
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2623 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2624 ** New menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2626 Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2627 item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2628 treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2629 to specify other menu separator types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2630
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2631 - `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2632
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2633 No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2634 separator occurs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2635
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2636 - `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2638 A single line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2640 - `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2641
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2642 A double line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2644 - `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2645
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2646 A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2647
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2648 - `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2649
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2650 A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2651
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2652 - `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2653
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2654 A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2655 displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2656
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2657 - `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2658
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2659 A single line with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2660
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2661 - `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2662
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2663 A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2665 - `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2666
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2667 A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2668
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2669 - `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2671 Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2673 - `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2675 Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2676
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2677 - `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2679 Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2681 - `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2682
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2683 Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2685 Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2686 the corresponding single-line separators.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2688 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2689 ** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2691 The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2692 `scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2693 Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2694 that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2695 default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2696 default background is the background color of the frame, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2697 default foreground is black.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2699 The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2700 (class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2701 `ScrollBarBackground').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2702
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2703 Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2704 settings for scroll bar colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2706 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2707 ** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2708 display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2709
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2710 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2711 ** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2712 starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2713 on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2714 line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2715 the original window start.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2716
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2717 ---
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2718 ** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2719 `hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2720 now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2722 +++
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2723 ** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2725 A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2726 `window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2727 windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2728 other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2730 The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2731 fixed-width and fixed-height.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2733 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2734
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2735 A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2736 fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2737 window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2738 change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2739 temporarily to nil, for example
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2741 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2742 (enlarge-window 10))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2743
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
2744 Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2745 or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
28094
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2746
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2747 ** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2748 terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2749 to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2750 overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2751 horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
e1e48e0663f6 Mention cursor-type support on MS-DOS terminals.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 28063
diff changeset
2752 support a vertical-bar cursor).
26652
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2753 ^L
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2754 * Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2755
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2756 ** Not new, but not mentioned before:
a556296b4c8a use-dialog-box <- use-dialogs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 26623
diff changeset
2757 M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2758
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2759 * Changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2760
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2761 ** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2763 You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2764 Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2765 `.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2767 If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2768 is the one that is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2769
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2770 ** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2771 the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2772 Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2773 separate from the command's regular output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2774 Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2775 says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2776 In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2777 the buffer name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2778
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2779 When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2780 output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2781 it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2782 cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2783
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2784 ** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2785 the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2786 is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2787 created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2788
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2789 ** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2790 example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2791 match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2792 quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2793
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2794 ** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2795 now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2796 if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2797 they never ignore case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2798
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2799 ** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2800 under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2801 applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2802 of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2803 just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2804 convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2805 part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2807 If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2808 the same format that was used in the file before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2810 You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2811 `inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2813 ** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2814 renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2815 This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2816
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2817 ** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2818 The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2819 buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2820 your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2821 is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2822 end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2823 Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2824
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2825 The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2826 eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2827 control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2828 format. You can now customize these variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2830 ** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2831 filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2832 filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2833 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2835 ** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2836 in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2837 windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2839 ** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2840 dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2841 doesn't have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2842
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2843 ** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2844 not one per buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2845
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2846 ** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2847 use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2848 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2849
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2850 ** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2851 To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2852 `auto-show-mode' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2854 ** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2855 avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2856 versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2857 choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2858 occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2860 ** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2861 cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2862
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2863 ** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2864 character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2865 feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2866
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2867 ** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2868 the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2869 interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2870 and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2871
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2872 ** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2874 The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2875 that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2876 one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2877 codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2878 set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2879
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2880 Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2881 from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2883 IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2884 equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2885 a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2886 `?' on other systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2888 IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2889 feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2890 Unix.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2892 Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2893 current codepage when it starts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2895 ** Mail changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2896
28051
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2897 *** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2898 `mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2899 appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2900 non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2901 MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2902 headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2903 latin-1:
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2904
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2905 MIME-version: 1.0
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2906 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2907 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
c60fdd764b01 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 28037
diff changeset
2908
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2909 *** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2910 default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2911 default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2912 sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2913 buffer-file-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2914
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2915 You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2916 sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2917 mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2918
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2919 *** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2920 if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2921 Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2922 list of possible coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2924 ** CC Mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2925
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2926 *** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2927 modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2928 longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2929 docstring for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2930
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2931 *** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2932 symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2933 found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2934 prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2935 lineup functions use this feature currently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2936
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2937 *** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2938 "finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2940 *** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2941 "catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2943 *** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2944 from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2945 symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2946 c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2947 anonymous classes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2949 *** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2950 syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2952 *** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2953 inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2954 support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2955 function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2956
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2957 *** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2958 (i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2959 brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2960 c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2961 (brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2962
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2963 *** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2965 *** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2966
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2967 *** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2968 for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2969
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2970 *** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2972 *** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2973 associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2974 This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2975 circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2976 class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2977
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2978 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2979
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2980 *** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2981 added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2982 Gnus manual for the full story.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2984 *** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2985 before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2986 group, which is created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2987
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2988 *** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2989 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2990
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2991 *** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2992
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2993 *** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2994 outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2995
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2996 *** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2997 `C-u C-c C-c'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2998
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
2999 *** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3000
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3001 *** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3002 re-highlighting of the article buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3003
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3004 *** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3005
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3006 *** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3007 Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3009 *** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3010 `a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3012 *** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3013 control over simplification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3015 *** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3016
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3017 *** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3018 limit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3019
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3020 *** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3021
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3022 *** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3023
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3024 *** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3025 If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3026 rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3027
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3028 *** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3029 `a' forces normal posting method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3030
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3031 *** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3032 -- `W d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3033
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3034 *** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3035 to a non-nil value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3036
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3037 *** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3038 where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3040 *** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3041 has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3043 *** A history of where mails have been split is available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3044
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3045 *** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3047 *** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3048 `gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3049
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3050 *** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3051 `message-cite-original-without-signature'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3052
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3053 *** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3054
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3055 *** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3056 been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3058 *** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3059 `gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3061 *** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3062 updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3063
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3064 *** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3066 *** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3068 *** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3069
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3070 ** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3072 *** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3073 options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3074 nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3076 *** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3077 TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3078 of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3079 TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3080 can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3082 *** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3083 All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3084 but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3085 the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3086
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3087 *** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3088 the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3089 buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3090 mismatch.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3092 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3094 *** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3095 file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3096
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3097 *** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3098 lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3099 characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3100 removed from the label.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3102 *** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3103 a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3104
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3105 *** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3106 customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3108 *** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3109 `reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3110 expressions.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3111
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3112 *** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3113
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3114 ** New/deleted modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3115
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3116 *** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3117 SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3119 *** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3120 editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3121 SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3123 *** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3124 changes with a special face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3125
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3126 *** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3127 this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3128 Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3130 * MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3132 ** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3133 This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3134 conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3135 and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3136 check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3137
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3138 The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3139 Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3140 distribution when the config.bat script is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3142 ** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3143 MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3144 controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3145 directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3146 Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3147 on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3148 string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3149 program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3150 printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3152 ** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3153 output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3154 available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3155 input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3156 temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3157 program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3159 An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3160 and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3161 programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3162 automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3163 as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3164 ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3166 ** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3167 a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3168 MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3169 was not documented clearly before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3171 ** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3172 This includes Tetris and Snake.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3174 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3176 ** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3177 return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3178 They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3179 meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3181 ** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3182 WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3183 and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3185 ** Changes in the file-attributes function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3186
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3187 *** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3188 It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3190 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3191 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3192 integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3194 ** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3195 files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3196 arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3197 file names and attributes are returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3198
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3199 ** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3200 sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3201 accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3202 It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3203 returns the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3205 ** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3206 to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3208 ** New functions for base64 conversion:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3210 The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3211 into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3212 performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3213 optionally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3215 Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3216 job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3218 **
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3219 The new function process-running-child-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3220 will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3221 terminal to its own child process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3222
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3223 ** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3224 when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3225 to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3226 itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3228 ** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3229 be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3230
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3231 ** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3232 :included is an alias for :visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3233
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3234 easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3235 easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3236 to move or copy menu entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3238 ** Multibyte editing changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3239
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3240 *** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3241 an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3242 make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3243 work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3244 char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3245 (setq char (sref str idx)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3246 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3247 The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3249 If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3250 (say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3251 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3252
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3253 *** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3254 region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3255 deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3256
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3257 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3258
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3259 This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3260 across the boundary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3261
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3262 *** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3263 `unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3264 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3265 contains 8-bit characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3266 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3267 contains invalid characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3269 *** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3270 text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3271 preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3272 text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3273 way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3275 *** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3276 If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3277 end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3278 prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3279
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3280 *** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3281 compose Thai characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3283 ** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3284 argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3285 for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3286 menus should always use the third argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3288 ** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3289 read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3290 arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3291 input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3292
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3293 ** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3294 of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3295 programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3296 inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3298 ** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3299 the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3300 returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3301 echo area contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3303 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3305 ** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3306 NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3307 requested feature cannot be loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3309 ** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3310 foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3311 means to clear out that attribute.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3313 ** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3314 gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3316 ** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3317 read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3318 unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3319 end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3321 ** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3322 the gap of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3324 ** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3325 to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3326 current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3327
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3328 ** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3329 facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3330 These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3331 it back in after any modifications have been made.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3333 * Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3334
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3335 ** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3336 the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3337 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3338 directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3339 subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3341 Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3342 names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3343 Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3344 which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3345 these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3346
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3347 Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3348 starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3349 time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3350
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3351 This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3352 Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3353 to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3354 subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3355 `.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3356 results.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3357
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3358 ** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3359 GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3360 that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3361 fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3362
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3363 * Changes in Emacs 20.3
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3365 ** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3366 including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3367 it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3368 perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3370 ** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3371 specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3372 region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3373 further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3374 command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3375 within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3376 are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3377 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3379 In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3380 selective undo.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3381
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3382 ** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3383 unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3384 buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3385 effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3386 Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3387
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3388 The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3389 though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3390 -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3391 load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3393 ** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3394 no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3395 enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3396 something that most users not do.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3398 ** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3399 operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3400 The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3401 applications.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3402
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3403 C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3404 pasting operations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3405
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3406 ** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3407 setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3408 like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3409 printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3410 `ps-printer-name'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3412 ** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3413 minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3414 any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3415 except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3416 incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3417 hits a new word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3418
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3419 Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3420 Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3421 to be confused by TeX commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3423 You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3424 correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3425 clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3426 of various alternative replacements and actions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3428 Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3429 the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3430 corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3431 alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3432 flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3434 Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3435 flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3436
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3437 ** Changes in input method usage.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3438
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3439 Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3440 the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3441 respectively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3442
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3443 You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3445 If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3446 of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3448 The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3449 that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3450
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3451 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3453 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3455 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3456 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3458 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3459 given in the following case:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3460 o When you are using a complex input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3461 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3463 If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3464 input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3465 and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3466 setting it to t is helpful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3467
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3468 The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3469
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3470 In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3471 keys:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3472 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3473 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3474 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3475 These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3476 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3477
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3478 ** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3479 names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3480 minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3481 get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3482
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3483 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3485 which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3487 Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3488 Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3489
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3490 ** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3491 at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3492 its owner and group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3494 ** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3495 Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3497 ** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3498 contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3500 ** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3501 which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3502 in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3503 by the left edge of the rectangle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3505 ** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3506 increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3507 C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3508 for writing keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3510 ** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3511 files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3512 frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3513 the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3514 additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3515 info.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3517 ** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3519 ** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3520 query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3521 contents only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3523 ** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3524 confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3525 the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3526 says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3528 ** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3529 non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3530 literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3532 ** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3533 now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3534 Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3535 inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3537 ** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3538 failure if the command produces no output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3539
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3540 ** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3541 manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3542 the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3543
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3544 ** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3545 mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3546 function and variable names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3548 ** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3549 reading specific files. This has higher priority than
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3550 file-coding-system-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3551
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3552 ** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3553 t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3554 converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3555 the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3556 according to the current fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3558 ** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3559
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3560 The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3561 that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3562 nonascii-insert-offset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3563
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3564 For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3565 enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3566 nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3567 characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3569 ** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3570 an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3572 ** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3573 letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3575 ** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3576 are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3577 command keys.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3579 ** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3580 user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3582 Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3583 user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3584 all variables that have documentation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3586 ** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3587 shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3588 that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3589 minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3590 it should show; the default is 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3592 Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3593 the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3594 of your input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3596 ** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3597 all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3598 recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3599 argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3600 the customizable options which were changed since that version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3601 Newly added options are included as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3603 If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3604 then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3605 for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3606
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3607 This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3608 Customize menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3609
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3610 ** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3611 the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3612
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3613 ** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3614 buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3615 invoked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3617 ** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3618 that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3619 The default is 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3621 ** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3622 syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3623 new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3624 (C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3625 sensibly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3626
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3627 ** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3628
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3629 ** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3630 value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3631 two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3632
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3633 ** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3634 reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3635 for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3636 every night.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3638 ** All you need to do, to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3639 the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3640
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3641 ** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3642 read and post multi-lingual articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3644 ** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3645 doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3646 be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3647 outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3648 the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3649 made invisible again.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3651 ** Mail reading and sending changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3653 *** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3654 the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3655 changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3656 toggle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3657
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3658 *** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3659 now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3660 summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3661 the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3662 rmail-default-body-file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3664 *** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3665 longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3666 handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3668 *** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3669 it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3670 is evaluated to insert the signature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3672 *** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3673 outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3674 handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3675 putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3676 transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3677 especially interested in trying feedmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3678
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3679 feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3680 feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3681 provided by feedmail are:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3682
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3683 **** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3684 stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3685 there is also a queue for draft messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3686
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3687 **** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3688 be prompted for confirmation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3690 **** does smart filling of address headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3691
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3692 **** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3693 the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3694 can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3696 **** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3697 the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3698 /usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3699 function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3701 ** Dired changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3702
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3703 *** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3704 files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3705
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3706 *** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3707 run Dired on the directory name at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3708
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3709 *** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3710 files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3711 for a specified regexp.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3713 ** VC Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3714
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3715 *** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3716 conveniently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3718 *** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3719 faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3720 Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3722 VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3723 directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3724 listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3725 currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3727 You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3728 then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3729 vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3730 control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3731 on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3732
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3733 All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3734 is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3735 `v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3736 the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3737 `vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3738
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3739 The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3740 toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3741 VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3742 `* l', to mark all files currently locked.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3743
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3744 Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3745 ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3746 command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3747
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3748 *** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3749 file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3750 session to resolve them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3752 Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3753 resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3754 contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3755 uses as well).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3756
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3757 *** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3758 command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3759 you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3760 either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3761 branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3762 If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3763 using ediff.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3764
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3765 ** Changes in Font Lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3767 *** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3768 are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3769 use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3770 unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3771 compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3773 ** Frame name display changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3775 *** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3776 frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3777 raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3778 when many frames are invisible or iconified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3779
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3780 *** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3781 frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3782 menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3783
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3784 ** Comint (subshell) changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3786 *** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3787 subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3788 with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3789
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3790 *** There are new commands in Comint mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3791
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3792 C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3793 that is, the line after the last line you got.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3794 You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3796 C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3797 send the current line together with the following line, when you send
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3798 the following line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3800 C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3801 which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3802 previously sent input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3804 C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3805 it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3806 as the search string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3807
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3808 *** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3809 automatically in compilation-mode windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3810
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3811 ** C mode changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3813 *** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3814 and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3815 assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3816 definition.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3817
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3818 *** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3819 (i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3820 Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3821 style is still the default however.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3822
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3823 *** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3824
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3825 *** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3826 are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3827 them. They do not have key bindings by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3829 *** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3830 and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3832 *** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3833 namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3835 *** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3836 makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3837
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3838 *** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3839 c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3841 *** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3842 should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3843 package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3844 variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3845
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3846 ** Changes to hippie-expand.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3847
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3848 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3849 non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3850 which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3852 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3853 non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3854 expanding dynamically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3855
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3856 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3857 non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3858
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3859 *** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3860 non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3861 this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3862 expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3863
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3864 *** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3866 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3867
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3868 *** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3869 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3870 automatic key generation. This replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3871 bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3872 against the first word in the title.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3874 *** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3875 capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3876 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3877 lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3878 lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3879 bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3881 *** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3882 generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3883 replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3884 bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3885
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3886 ** Changes in vcursor.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3888 *** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3889 and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3890 variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3891 entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3892 `vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3893 in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3894
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3895 *** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3896 Editing group once the package is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3897
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3898 *** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3899 generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3900 vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3901
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3902 *** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3903 vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3904
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3905 ** Ispell changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3906
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3907 *** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3908 buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3909 are identified by syntax tables in effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3910
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3911 *** Generic region skipping implemented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3912 A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3913 and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3914 defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3915 include:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3916
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3917 o URLs are automatically skipped
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3918 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3920 *** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3922 ** Changes to RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3923
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3924 RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3925 large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3926 re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3927 section `Optimizations' in the manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3929 *** New recursive parser.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3930
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3931 The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3932 entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3933 recursive parser scans the individual files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3934
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3935 *** Parsing only part of a document.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
3936
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3937 Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3938 partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3939 the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3941 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3943 *** Storing parsing information in a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3945 This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3946
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3947 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3949 *** Using multiple selection buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3950
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3951 If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3952 for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3953
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3954 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3955
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3956 *** References to external documents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3958 The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3959 documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3960 documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3961 macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3962 RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3963 the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3964 The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3965
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3966 *** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3967
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3968 The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3969 and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3970
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3971 Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3972 the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3973
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3974 *** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3976 The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3977 buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3978
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3979 *** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3980
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3981 The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3982 contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3983 `reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3984 have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3985 enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3986 at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3987 more.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3988
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3989 *** Support for the varioref package
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3990
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3991 The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3992
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3993 *** New hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3995 Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3996 and citations are created. These hooks are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3997 `reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3998 `reftex-format-cite-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
3999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4000 *** Citations outside LaTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4002 The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4003 a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4004
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4005 *** Short context is no longer fontified.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4006
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4007 The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4008 fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4009 fontified, use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4010
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4011 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4012
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4013 ** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4014 With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4015 the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4016 directories that contain the same file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4017
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4018 Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4019 Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4020 file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4021 Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4022 have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4023 names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4024 directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4025 directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4027 ** New modes and packages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4029 *** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4030 It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4031 it, but some do not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4032
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4033 *** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4034 code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4036 *** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4037 current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4038 around in a buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4039
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4040 Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4041
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4042 *** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4043 uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4044 be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4045 established system of notation similar to Chess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4046
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4047 *** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4048 documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4049 guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4050
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4051 *** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4052 available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4053 system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4054 simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4055 functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4056 the like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4058 *** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4059 identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4061 *** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4062 within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4063 used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4064 the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4066 *** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4067
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4068 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4069 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4070 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4071 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4072 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4073 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4074 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4075 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4076 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4077 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4078 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4080 Platform-specific modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4082 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4083 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4084 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4085 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4086 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4087 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4088 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4089 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4090 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4092 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4094 ** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4095 use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4096 That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4097 Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4098
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4099 Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4100 you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4101 consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4102
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4103 ** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4104 and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4105 specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4106 searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4108 ** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4109 multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4110 character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4111 environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4113 ** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4114 take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4115 string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4116 current input method for reading this one event.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4117
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4118 ** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4119 now control whether to output certain characters as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4120 backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4121 non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4122 characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4123 in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4125 * Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4127 ** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4128 of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4130 ** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4131 in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4132 always increases point by 1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4133
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4134 The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4135 considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4137 See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4138
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4139 ** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4140 Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4141 default value changed. For example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4142
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4143 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4144 :type 'integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4145 :group 'foo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4146 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4147
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4148 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4149 :version "20.3")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4151 If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4152 default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4153 is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4154 `:version' in the top level group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4155
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4156 This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4158 ** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4159 starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4161 However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4162 symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4163 support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4164 to themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4166 If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4167 this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4168 values whatever.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4169
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4170 ** There is a new debugger command, R.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4171 It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4172 in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4174 ** Frame-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4176 You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4177 the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4178 local bindings for that variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4179
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4180 These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4181 frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4182 modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4183 parameter name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4185 Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4186 Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4187 active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4188 that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4190 It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4191 clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4192 very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4193 through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4195 ** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4196 "symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4197 evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4198 makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4199 See the documentation in sregex.el.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4200
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4201 ** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4202 is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4203 parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4204 The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4205
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4206 ** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4207 If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4209 ** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4210 known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4211 define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4212
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4213 ** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4214 when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4215 it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4216 history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4218 The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4219 return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4220 empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4221
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4222 ** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4223 for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4224 `iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4225 Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4226 `read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4227
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4228 ** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4229 echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4230 a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4231 default password to use if the user enters nothing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4233 ** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4234 specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4235 function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4236 place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4237 non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4238
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4239 ** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4240 If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4241 up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4242 end of the window, even if this requires computation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4243
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4244 ** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4245 which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4246 If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4247
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4248 ** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4249 holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4250 was directed to display this buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4252 ** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4253 with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4254 describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4255 other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4256 set-window-configuration.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4258 ** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4259 window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4260 positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4261 windows and the choice of buffers to display.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4262
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4263 ** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4264 override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4265 look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4267 If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4268 non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4269 map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4271 minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4272 and it is meant to be set by major modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4273
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4274 ** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4275 except that it discards all text properties from the result.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4277 ** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4278 USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4279 floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4281 ** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4282 to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4283 in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4284 it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4286 ** Menu changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4288 *** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4289 keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4290 better supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4292 The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4293 a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4294 you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4295 can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4296 then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4297
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4298 *** A new format for menu items is supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4300 In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4301 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4302 defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4303 starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4305 The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4306 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4307 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4308 where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4309 string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4310 The supported properties include
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4311
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4312 :enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4313 item is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4314 :visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4315 item should appear in the menu.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
4316 :filter FILTER-FN
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4317 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4318 which will be REAL-BINDING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4319 It should return a binding to use instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4320 :keys DESCRIPTION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4321 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4322 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4323 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4324 :key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4325 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4326 keyboard binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4327 :key-sequence nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4328 This means that the command normally has no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4329 keyboard equivalent.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4330 :help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4331 :button (TYPE . SELECTED)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4332 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4333 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4334 value says whether this button is currently selected.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4336 Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4337 Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4339 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4341 ** New event types
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4342
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4343 *** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4344 mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4345 corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4346 which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4348 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4350 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4351 same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4352 indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4353 negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4354 the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4355 forward, away from the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4356
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4357 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4359 *** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4360 files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4361 and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4362 filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4363 loaded into Emacs. The format is:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4364
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4365 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4366
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4367 where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4368 same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4369 that were dragged and dropped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4371 As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4372
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4373 ** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4375 *** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4376 any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4377 to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4378
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4379 *** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4380 can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4381 that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4383 *** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4384 in Emacs 19 and before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4385
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4386 The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4387 The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4389 *** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4390 buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4391 unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4392 representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4393
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4394 This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4395 as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4396 viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4397 one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4398 will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4399
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4400 This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4401 representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4402 (including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4403 consistent with the new representation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4405 *** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4406 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4407 about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4408 however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4409
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4410 The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4411 nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4412 using the table nonascii-translation-table.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4413
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4414 *** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4415 representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4416 representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4418 The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4419 loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4420 is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4421
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4422 *** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4423 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4425 *** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4426 which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4428 *** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4429 portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4430 so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4431 You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4432
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4433 *** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4434 it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4435
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4436 *** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4437 convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4438 buffer or string being searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4439
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4440 One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4441 [...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4442 searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4443 searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4444 obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4445 you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4446 expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4447
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4448 *** Structure of coding system changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4450 All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4451 by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4452 which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4453 as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4454 vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4455 your own alias name of a coding system by the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4456 define-coding-system-alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4458 The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4459 the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4460 access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4461 pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4462 character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4463 safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4464 'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4465 `iso-8859-1'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4467 Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4468 The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4469 coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4470 (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4472 Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4473 also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4474 are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4475 the other character sets and read it back correctly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4476
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4477 *** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4478 proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4479 This function requires a user interaction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4480
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4481 *** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4482 find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4483 select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4484 systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4485 a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4486 select-safe-coding-system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4487
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4488 *** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4489 decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4490 last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4491 was done.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4492
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4493 *** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4494 used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4495 coding systems used by some specific language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4497 *** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4498 return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4499 characters are found, they now return a list of single element
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4500 `undecided' or its subsidiaries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4502 *** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4503 coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4504 coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4505 converted.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4507 *** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4508 coding system for communicating with other X clients.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4510 *** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4511 character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4512 character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4513 each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4514 either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4515 range of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4517 *** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4518 Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4520 *** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4521 in the current buffer at position POS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4523 *** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4524 input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4525 function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4526 character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4527 event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4528 binding input-method-function to nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4529
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4530 The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4531 method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4532 input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4533 the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4534 not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4535
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4536 The input method function is not called when reading the second and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4537 subsequent events of a key sequence.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4539 *** You can customize any language environment by using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4540 set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4541
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4542 The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4543 customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4544 instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4545 environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4546 exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4547
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4548 * Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4550 ** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4551 options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4552 at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4553 tree structure.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4554
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4555 M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4556 user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4558 With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4559 session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4560 in your .emacs file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4561
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4562 ** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4563 You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4565 ** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4566 This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4567
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4568 ** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4569 immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4570 kills the region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4571
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4572 The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4573 delete the character before point, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4575 ** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4576 on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4577 by setting search-highlight to nil.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4579 ** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4580 insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4581 the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4582 onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4583 history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4584 past.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4586 ** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4587 This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4588 in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4589 TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4590 makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4592 As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4593 and is an alias for it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4594
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4595 If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4596 use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4598 ** Scrolling changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4599
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4600 *** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4601 position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4602
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4603 In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4604 on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4605 where it started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4606
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4607 *** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4608 move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4609 screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4610 does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4611
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4612 *** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4613 top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4614 comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4615 recenters the window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4617 ** International character set support (MULE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4618
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4619 Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4620 including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4621 Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4622 Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4623 features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4624 MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4625
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4626 Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4627 coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4628 character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4629 variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4630 into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4631
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4632 Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4633 generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4634 supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4635 language, to make it possible to type them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4636
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4637 The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4638 character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4640 The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4641 to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4642
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4643 You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4645 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4647 Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4648 characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4649 argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4650 already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4651 characters for their work until they want to change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4652
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4653 *** Input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4654
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4655 An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4656 specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4657 has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4658 the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4659 support several input methods.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4660
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4661 The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4662 another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4663 work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4665 A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4666 characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4667 composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4668 consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4669 sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4670 letter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4671
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4672 The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4673 by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4674 First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4675 marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4676 mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4678 None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4679 they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4680 phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4681 converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4682
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4683 Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4684 word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4685 typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4686 the first guess is wrong.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4688 *** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4689 turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4691 If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4692 byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4693 they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4694 the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4696 However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4697 use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4698 includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4699 translate automatically to and from either one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4700
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4701 *** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4702
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4703 Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4704 file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4705 sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4706 what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4708 If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4709 example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4710 system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4711 multibyte characters in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4713 If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4714 character conversion as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4716 *** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4718 A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4719 Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4720 requires using many fonts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4721
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4722 Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4723 collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4725 A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4726 the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4727 have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4728 you would use a font.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4729
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4730 If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4731 specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4732 display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4734 The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4735 (that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4736 characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4737 or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4738 and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4739
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4740 *** Defining fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4741
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4742 Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4743 chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4744 with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4745
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4746 Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4747 of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4748 `fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4749 standard fontset are created automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4750
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4751 If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4752 argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4753 FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4754 with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4755 name is `fontset-startup'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4756
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4757 Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4758 The resource value should have this form:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4759 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4760 FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4761 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4762 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4763 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4764 The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4765 of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4766 CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4767 FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4768
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4769 Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4770 last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4771 You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4772
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4773 For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4774 font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4775 following resource,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4776 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4777 the font for ASCII is generated as below:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4778 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4779 Here is the substitution rule:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4780 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4781 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4782 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4783 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4784 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4786 The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4787 fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4788 that function explicitly to create a fontset.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4789
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4790 With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4791 like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4792 name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4793 fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4794 fontsets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4796 *** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4797 defaults for a particular choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4798
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4799 Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4800 method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4801 visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4802 already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4803 language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4804 system for new files that you create.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4805
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4806 It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4807 set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4808 whole Emacs session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4810 For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4811 chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4812 with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4813
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4814 *** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4815 specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4816 specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4817 the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4818 coding systems that Emacs supports.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4819
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4820 *** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4821 lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4822 This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4823 After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4824 is used for *the immediately following command*.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4826 So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4827 write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4829 If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4830 then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4831
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4832 For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4833 visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4834
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4835 *** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4836 construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4837 to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4838 specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4839 of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4841 *** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4842 the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4843 code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4844 translated into that character code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4845
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4846 This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4847 various countries to support the languages of those countries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4848
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4849 By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4850
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4851 *** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4852 the coding system for keyboard input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4854 Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4855 with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4856 some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4858 By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4860 Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4861 input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4862 translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4863 to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4864 designed to work with terminals.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4865
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4866 *** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4867 specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4868 This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4869 has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4870 translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4871 in the corresponding buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4872
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4873 By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4875 *** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4876 to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4877 It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4879 *** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4880 an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4881 command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4882 want to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4883
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4884 C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4885 method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4886
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4887 *** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4888 layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4889 remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4890 which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4892 *** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4893 the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4894 related information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4895
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4896 *** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4897 HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4898 scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4899
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4900 *** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4901 information about the support for a particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4902 You specify the language as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4903
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4904 *** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4905 the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4906 first dash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4907
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4908 A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4909 (except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4910 whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4911 1 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4913 A alternativnyj (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4914 B big5 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4915 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4916 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4917 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4918 E euc-japan (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4919 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4920 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4921 K euc-korea (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4922 R koi8 (Russian)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4923 Q tibetan
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4924 S shift_jis (Japanese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4925 T lao
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4926 T tis620 (Thai)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4927 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4928 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4929 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4930 v viqr (Vietnamese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4931 z hz (Chinese)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4932
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4933 When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4934 two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4935 coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4936 keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4938 *** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4939 conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4940
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4941 When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4942 into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4943 rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4944 Rmail files themselves.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4945
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4946 *** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4947 conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4948
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4949 Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4950 for sending mail:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4952 - If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4953 - Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4954 - Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4955 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4956 - Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4957
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4958 *** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4959 to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4960 Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4961 translations.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4962
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4963 ** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4964 of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4965 insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4966 without any conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4967
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4968 ** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4969 You can now specify any number of octal digits.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4970 RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4971 any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4972
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4973 ** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4974 functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4976 Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4977 Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4978
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4979 Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4980 mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4981
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4982 ** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4983 complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4984 in the buffer before point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4986 With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4987 symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4988 you are using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4990 With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4991 just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4992
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4993 ** File locking works with NFS now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4994
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4995 The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4996 in the same directory as FILENAME.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4997
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4998 This means that collision detection between two different machines now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
4999 works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5000 can become a bottleneck.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5001
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5002 The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5003 does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5004 create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5005 file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5006 rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5007 so useful that the change is worth while.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5008
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5009 When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5010 are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5011 collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5012 tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5014 ** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5015 it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5016 show-paren-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5017
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5018 ** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5019 selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5020 delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5021
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5022 ** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5023 within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5024 complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5025
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5026 ** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5027 it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5028 set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5029
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5030 ** Changes in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5032 *** Several new commands are available in View mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5033 Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5034
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5035 *** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5036 view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5037
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5038 *** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5039 previous state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5041 *** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5042 scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5043
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5044 *** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5045 non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5046 not just the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5047
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5048 *** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5049 read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5050 turns View mode on or off.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5052 *** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5053 how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5054 delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5056 ** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5057 now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5059 ** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5060 has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5061 presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5062 which version to compare with.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5063
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5064 ** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5065 blocks if a match is inside the block.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5066
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5067 The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5068 is outside the block. By customizing the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5069 isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5070 shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5071
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5072 By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5073 of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5074 blocks, all of them or none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5076 ** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5077 current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5078 confirmation first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5079
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5080 ** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5081 now changes the major mode according to that file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5082 However, the mode will not be changed if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5083 (1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5084 (2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5085 not suitable for ordinary files, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5086 (3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5087
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5088 This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5090 However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5091 these commands do not change the major mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5092
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5093 ** M-x occur changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5094
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5095 *** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5096 it performs a case-sensitive search.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5097
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5098 *** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5099 if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5100 using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5102 ** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5103 in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5104 window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5105 that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5106 buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5107
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5108 ** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5109 after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5110 appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5111 come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5113 ** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5114 selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5115 buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5116
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5117 ** Outline mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5118
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5119 *** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5121 *** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5123 ** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5124 you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5125 Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5126 was already active.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5128 The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5129 unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5130 get confused by it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5131
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5132 If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5133 set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5135 ** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5137 *** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5138 conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5139 character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5140 including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5142 The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5143 mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5144 copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5145
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5146 *** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5147 are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5148 values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5149
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5150 `dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5151 case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5152 `dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5153 case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5155 ** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5156 certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5157 can be. The default value is 30.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5158
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5159 ** Changes in Mail mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5161 *** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5162 Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5163 composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5164 `mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5165 `sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5166 behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5168 C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5169 compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5170
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5171 *** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5172 the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5173 replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5174 buffer that shows the original message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5176 *** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5177 with separator lines around the contents.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5178
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5179 *** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5180 in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5181 definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5182 need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5183
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5184 *** New features in the mail-complete command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5185
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5186 **** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5187 for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5188 controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5189 Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5190
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5191 **** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5192 to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5193 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5194
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5195 **** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5196 to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5197 /etc/passwd.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5198
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5199 ** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5200 special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5201 directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5202 reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5203
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5204 Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5205 when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5206 be taken to be magic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5207
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5208 ** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5209 files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5210 available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5211
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5212 M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5213 (-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5215 ** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5216 suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5217
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5218 In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5219
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5220 new key dired.el binding old key
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5221 ------- ---------------- -------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5222 * c dired-change-marks c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5223 * m dired-mark m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5224 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5225 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5226 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5227 * u dired-unmark u
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5228 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5229 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5230 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5231 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5232 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5233 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5234
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5235 ** Rmail changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5236
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5237 *** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5238 saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5239 chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5240 each time you run it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5241
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5242 *** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5243 whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5244
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5245 *** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5246 messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5247 means to move in the opposite direction.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5249 *** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5250 you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5251
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5252 *** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5253 just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5254 It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5255 can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5256 for output.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5258 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5259
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5260 *** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5261
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5262 *** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5263 Gnus.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5265 *** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5266 `and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5267
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5268 *** Article washing status can be displayed in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5269 article mode line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5271 *** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5272
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5273 *** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5274
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5275 (setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5277 *** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5278 are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5279 `gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5281 *** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5283 *** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5284
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5285 *** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5286 See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5287
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5288 *** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5289 Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5290 used to pick articles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5291
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5292 *** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5293 another have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5295 `M-x gnus-change-server'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5297 *** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5298 generating lines in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5300 *** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5301 `M-C-_'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5302
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5303 *** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5305 *** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5306
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5307 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5308
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5309 *** Scores can be decayed.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5310
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5311 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5313 *** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5314 Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5315
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5316 *** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5317 the native server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5319 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5320
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5321 *** A new command for reading collections of documents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5322 (nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5323
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5324 *** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5325
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5326 *** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5327 even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5329 *** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5330 (DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5331
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5332 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5333 a group.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5334
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5335 *** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5336 sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5337
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5338 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5339
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5340 *** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5341
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5342 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5344 *** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5345
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5346 Use the `Y c' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5348 *** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5349
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5350 *** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5351
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5352 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5353
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5354 *** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5355 from incoming mail before saving the mail.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5356
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5357 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5359 *** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5360
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5361 *** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5362 the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5364 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5366 Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5367 and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5368 from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5369 hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5370 this issue.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5371
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5372 Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5373 automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5374 particular news group. This can be done by:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5376 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5378 Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5379 of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5380 "XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5381 system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5382 for reading and posting).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5383
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5384 CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5385 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5386 Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5387 newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5388 there.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5390 Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5391 default. Here are some of these default settings:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5393 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5394 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5395 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5396 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5397 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5399 When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5400 the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5401
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5402 ** CC mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5403
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5404 *** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5405 code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5406 values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5407 this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5408 Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5409 loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5410
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5411 If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5412 Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5413 style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5414 share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5415 c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5416 must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5417
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5418 *** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5419 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5420
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5421 *** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5422 it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5423 of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5424
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5425 *** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5426 style that the Python developers like.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5427
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5428 *** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5429 This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5430 just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5431
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5432 ** VC Changes [new]
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5434 ** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5435 name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5436 directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5437
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5438 This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5439 master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5440 developers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5441
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5442 You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5443 RET in a buffer visiting that file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5445 *** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5446 other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5447 writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5448 calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5449
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5450 *** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5451 version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5452
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5453 ** Calendar changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5455 A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5456 of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5457 for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5459 ** ps-print changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5460
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5461 There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5463 *** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5464
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5465 The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5466 formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5467 `a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5468 `ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5469 It defaults to `letter'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5470 If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5471
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5472 The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5473 of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5474 non-nil means "landscape" mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5476 The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5477 It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5478 It defaults to 1.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5479
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5480 *** Horizontal layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5482 The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5483 `ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5484 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5485
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5486 *** Vertical layout
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5487
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5488 The vertical layout is determined by the variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5489 `ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5490 All are measured in points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5491
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5492 *** Headers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5494 If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5495 `ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5496 margin above the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5497
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5498 If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5499 framing box is printed around the header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5500
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5501 The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5502 `ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5503
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5504 The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5505 `ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5506 `ps-header-font-size'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5507
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5508 *** Font managing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5509
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5510 The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5511 used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5512 `ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5513 elements to this alist.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5514
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5515 The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5516 for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5517
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5518 ** hideshow changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5519
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5520 *** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5521 C++, ; for lisp).
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5522
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5523 *** Support for java-mode added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5525 *** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5526 in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5527
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5528 *** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5529 the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5530 way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5532 *** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5533 robust and a lot faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5534
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5535 *** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5536
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5537 *** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5538 to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5539 documentation for more details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5540
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5541 ** Changes in Enriched mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5542
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5543 *** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5544 filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5545 of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5546 use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5547 the next time unless the fill-column is different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5548
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5549 *** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5550 distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5551 as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5552 as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5553
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5554 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5556 *** Custom support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5558 The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5559 font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5560 faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5561 group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5562 your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5563 consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5565 You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5567 *** Maximum decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5569 Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5570 default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5571 of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5572 supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5573 to get the old behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5574
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5575 *** New support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5576
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5577 Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5578
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5579 Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5580 support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5581
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5582 *** Configurable support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5583
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5584 Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5585 additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5586 c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5587 java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5588 list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5589 of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5590 convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5591
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5592 Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5593 way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5594 it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5596 *** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5598 You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5599 highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5600 for any mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5601
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5602 For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5604 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5606 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5608 *** New faces
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5609
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5610 Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5611 font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5612 distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5613 to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5615 *** Changes to fast-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5616
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5617 The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5618 cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5619 same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5621 *** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5622
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5623 The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5624 according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5625 the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5626 non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5627 refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5628 the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5629 Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5630
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5631 This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5632 For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5633 this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5634 refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5635 containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5636 the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5637
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5638 As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5640 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5641 Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5642 Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5643 new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5644
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5645 If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5646 settings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5647
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5648 ** Ada mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5649
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5650 *** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5651 If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5652 procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5653 you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5654 stubs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5656 *** There are two new commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5657 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5658 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5660 The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5661 `ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5662 `ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5663
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5664 *** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5665 is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5666 Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5668 *** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5669 formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5670 places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5671 space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5672
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5673 ** Scheme mode changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5674
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5675 *** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5676 mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5677 for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5678 with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5679 have any effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5680
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5681 If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5682 still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5683 scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5684 variables as buffer-local variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5686 *** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5687 Use M-x dsssl-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5688
27307
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5689 ** Changes to the emacsclient program
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5690
27475
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5691 *** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5692 USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5693 associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5694 can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
d44d90480852 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27473
diff changeset
5695
27307
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5696 *** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5697 it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5698 buffer in Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5699
27307
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5700 *** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5701 use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5702 ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5703 option takes precedence.
1d69cbf8a91e emacsclient, --alternate-editor
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27276
diff changeset
5704
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5705 ** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5706 constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5707 (in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5708
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5709 ** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5710 which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5711 the current defun.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5712
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5713 ** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5714 following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5715
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5716 ** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5717 and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5718 necessary).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5719
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5720 ** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5721 if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5722 these register values no longer become completely useless.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5723 If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5724 asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5725 it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5726
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5727 ** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5728 example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5729 be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5730 you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5731
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5732 You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5733 variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5734 file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5735 revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5736 only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5737
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5738 ** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5739 since it applies only to the current frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5740
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5741 ** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5742 file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5743 and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5744
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5745 This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5746 multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5747 variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5748 tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5749 instead of just the file you are editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5750
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5751 ** RefTeX mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5752
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5753 RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5754 and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5755 different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5756 multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5757 turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5758
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5759 C-c ( reftex-label
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5760 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5761 knows which kind of label is needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5763 C-c ) reftex-reference
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5764 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5765 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5766
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5767 C-c [ reftex-citation
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5768 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5769 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5770
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5771 C-c & reftex-view-crossref
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5772 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5773
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5774 C-c = reftex-toc
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5775 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5776 can quickly jump to every section.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5777
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5778 Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5779 commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5780 Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5781 reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5782 C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5783
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5784 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5785
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5786 *** Info documentation is now available.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5787
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5788 *** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5789 both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5790
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5791 *** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5792 bibtex-user-optional-fields.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5793
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5794 *** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5795 (use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5796
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5797 *** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5798 entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5799 appropriate functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5800
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5801 *** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5802 entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5803
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5804 *** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5805 been cleaned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5807 *** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5808 bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5810 *** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5811 shall be delimited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5812
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5813 *** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5814 bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5815 bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5816
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5817 *** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5818 field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5819 prefixed with `ALT'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5820
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5821 *** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5822 bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5823 formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5824 documentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5825
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5826 *** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5827 documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5828 for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5829
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5830 *** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5831 comma should be inserted at end of last field.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5832
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5833 *** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5834 alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5835 signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5836
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5837 *** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5838
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5839 *** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5841 *** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5842 from alien sources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5843
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5844 *** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5845 to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5846 crossref entries.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5848 *** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5849 region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5850
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5851 *** Added support for imenu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5852
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5853 *** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5854 of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5855 `compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5856 `next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5857
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5858 *** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5859 from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5860
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5861 ** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5862
27136
a0288373f30a Correct typos.
Eli Zaretskii <eliz@gnu.org>
parents: 27112
diff changeset
5863 ** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
27112
82ad511a02f6 *** empty log message ***
Gerd Moellmann <gerd@gnu.org>
parents: 27094
diff changeset
5864
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5865 ** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5866 functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5867 Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5868 as an argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5869
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5870 When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5871 and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5872
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5873 ** browse-url changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5874
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5875 *** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5876 Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5877 (browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5878 non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5879 customization variables.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5880
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5881 *** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5883 *** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5884 lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5885 (e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5886
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5887 ** Changes in Ediff
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5888
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5889 *** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5890 pops up the Info file for this command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5892 *** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5893 the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5894 merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5895 directories).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5896
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5897 *** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5898 and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5899 files in the same directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5901 *** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5902 The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5903 related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5904
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5905 ** Changes in Viper
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5906
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5907 *** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5908 *** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5909 instead of vip-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5910 *** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
5911 *** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5912 Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5913 *** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5914 *** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5915 *** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5916 color when Viper is in insert state.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5917 *** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5918 Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5919 viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5920
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5921 ** Etags changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5922
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5923 *** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5924 default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5925 Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5926 variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5927 not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5929 *** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5930
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5931 *** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5932 constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5933
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5934 *** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5935 recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5936 In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5937
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5938 *** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5939 C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5940 recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5941 methods and protocols.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5942
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5943 *** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5944 .cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5945 column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5946 paragraph name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5947
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5948 *** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5949 an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5950 at least M times and as many as N times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5952 ** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5953 in files has changed slightly.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5954
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5955 With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5956 time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5957 This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5958 with old time-stamp-format values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5959
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5960 In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5961 (`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5962 This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5963 reasons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5964
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5965 In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5966 natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5967 fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5968 (`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5969 time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5970 specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5971
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5972 Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5973 case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5974 truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5975
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5976 The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5977 being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5978 future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5979 recommended now will continue to work then.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5980
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5981 See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5982 details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5984 ** There are some additional major modes:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5986 dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5987 m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5988 meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5989
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5990 ** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5991 copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5992 into Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5993
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5994 ** New Lisp packages include:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5995
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5996 *** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5997
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5998 *** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
5999 be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6000
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6001 *** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6002
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6003 *** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6004 in shell buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6005
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6006 *** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6007 See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6008 and `elint-defun'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6009
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6010 *** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6011 meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6012 ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6013 strings or comments.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6014
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6015 These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6016 abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6017 you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6018 insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6019 at these points.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6020
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6021 *** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6022 can visit them by short forms of their names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6023
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6024 *** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6025 Emacs Lisp function at point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6026
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6027 *** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6029 *** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6030 switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6031
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6032 *** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6033
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6034 *** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6036 *** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6037
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6038 *** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6039 from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6041 *** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6042 You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6043 inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6044 original place after inserting the copy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6045
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6046 *** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6047 on the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6048
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6049 You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6050 velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6051 (with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6052
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6053 Enable mouse-drag with:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6054 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6055 -or-
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6056 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6057
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6058 *** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6059 mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6061 *** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6062 It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6063
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6064 *** ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6065
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6066 The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6067 Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6068 platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6069 TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6070 ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6071 prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6072 instance) and vice versa.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6073
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6074 To use this package load it using
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6075 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6076 Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6077 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6078 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6079 The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6080 ways of customization in `.emacs'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6081
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6082 *** Interface to ph.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6083
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6084 Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6086 The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6087 services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6088 these servers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6090 *** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6092 *** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6093 You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6094 while the real cursor does not move.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6095
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6096 *** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6097 for visiting your favorite web sites.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6098
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6099 *** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6100 so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6102 ** movemail change
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6103
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6104 Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6105 mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6106 supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6107 user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6109 This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6110
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6111 * Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6113 ** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6115 Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6116 end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6117 Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6118 file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6119 file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6120
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6121 To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6122 C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6123 coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6124 specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6125 LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6126 save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6127
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6128 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6129
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6130 ** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6131 Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6132 vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6133 Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6134
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6135 ** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6136 to start with w32- instead of win32-.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6137
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6138 In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6139 don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6140 "win".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6141
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6142 ** Basic Lisp changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6144 *** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6145 evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6147 *** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6148 be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6149 or by the user.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6150
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6151 The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6152
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6153 *** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6154
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6155 (when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6156 (unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6158 *** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6159 usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6160 its argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6161
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6162 *** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6163
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6164 *** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6165
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6166 *** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6168 *** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6169 error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6170 include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6171 `format' function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6172
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6173 *** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6174 or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6175 whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6176
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6177 *** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6178 either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6179 adding one of these suffixes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6181 *** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6182 which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6183 If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6184
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6185 We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6186 because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6188 *** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6189
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6190 *** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6191 You must load the `cl' library to define it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6192
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6193 *** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6194 conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6195
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6196 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6198 BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6199 BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6200
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6201 *** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6202 choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6203 restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6204 works using `save-current-buffer'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6205
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6206 *** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6207 write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6208 of the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6209
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6210 *** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6211 which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6212 last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6213 as the last form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6215 *** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6216 characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6217 matches.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6219 For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6221 *** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6222 with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6223 Then it returns that string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6224
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6225 For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6227 (with-output-to-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6228 (princ "The buffer is ")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6229 (princ (buffer-name)))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6230
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6231 returns "The buffer is foo".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6232
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6233 ** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6234 is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6236 These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6237 buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6238 characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6239
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6240 *** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6241 a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6243 Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6244 character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6245 Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6246 position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6247 characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6248 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6249
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6250 ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6251 Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6252 non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6253 characters".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6255 The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6256 through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6257 "leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6258 range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6259 leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6260
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6261 *** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6262 (forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6263 multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6264 character, which may be more than one buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6265
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6266 This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6267 always one buffer position, need to be changed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6268
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6269 However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6270
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6271 *** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6272 because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6273 have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6274 the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6275 guaranteed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6276
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6277 *** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6278 between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6279 character).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6280
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6281 When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6283 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6284 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6285 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6286 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6287 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6288
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6289 *** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6290
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6291 *** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6292 `length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6293 more than the number of characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6295 You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6296 it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6297 \xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6298 is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6299 follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6300 newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6302 *** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6303 and returns a string containing those characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6304
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6305 *** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6306 (sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6307 counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6308 character, sref signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6309
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6310 *** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6311 in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6312 string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6313
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6314 *** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6315 in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6316 region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6317
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6318 *** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6319 the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6320 to a vector of the characters in it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6321
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6322 *** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6323 of a string. You call it as follows:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6324
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6325 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6326
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6327 This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6328 STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6329 This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6330 Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6331 it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6332
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6333 *** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6334 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6336 *** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6337 if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6338
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6339 *** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6340 to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6341 not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6342 which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6343
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6344 (truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6345
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6346 This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6347
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6348 The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6349 If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6350 are not included in the resulting value.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6351
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6352 The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6353 at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6354 WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6355 is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6356
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6357 If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6358 place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6359 character extends across that column), then the padding character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6360 PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6361 string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6362 column START-COLUMN.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6363
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6364 *** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6365 the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6366 necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6367 difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6368 changed text, before the change.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6369
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6370 *** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6371 sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6372 one character set for each script, not for each language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6373
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6374 **** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6375
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6376 **** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6377
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6378 **** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6379 set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6380
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6381 **** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6382 name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6383 which identify the character within that character set.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6385 **** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6386 byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6387 opposite of split-char.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6388
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6389 **** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6390 of all the characters between BEG and END.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6391
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6392 **** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6393 of all the characters in a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6395 *** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6396 and specifying coding systems.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6397
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6398 **** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6399 system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6400 of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6401 (Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6402 and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6403 as what to do about code conversion.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6404
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6405 **** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6406 name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6407
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6408 **** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6409 for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6410 except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6411
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6412 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6413 which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6414 to match against a file name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6415
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6416 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6417 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6418 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6419 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6420 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6421 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6422
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6423 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6424 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6425
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6426 **** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6427 the coding system to use for network sockets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6429 Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6430 which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6431 either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6432 service names.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6433
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6434 VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6435 a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6436 decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6437 to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6438 systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6439 specifies the coding system for encoding.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6440
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6441 If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6442 or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6443
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6444 **** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6445 for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6446 except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6447 start the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6449 **** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6450 systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6451 when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6452 (OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6453 to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6454
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6455 **** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6456 coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6457 subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6458
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6459 It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6460 but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6461 start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6462 connection permanently or until overridden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6463
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6464 The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6465 file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6466 network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6467 coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6468 It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6469 system for one operation at a time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6470
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6471 **** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6472 files, subprocesses or network connections.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6474 **** The function process-coding-system tells you what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6475 coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6476 The value is a cons cell,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6477 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6478 where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6479 the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6480 input to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6482 **** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6483 change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6484
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6485 ** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6486 customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6487 you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6488
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6489 You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6490 variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6491 information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6492 legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6493 customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6494
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6495 Thus, instead of writing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6496
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6497 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6498 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6499
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6500 you would now write this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6501
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6502 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6503 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6504 :type 'boolean
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6505 :group foo)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6507 The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6508 two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6509 describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6510 for a description of them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6511
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6512 The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6513 should belong to. You define a new group like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6514
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6515 (defgroup ispell nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6516 "Spell checking using Ispell."
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6517 :group 'processes)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6519 The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6520 group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6521 but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6522 to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6523 second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6524
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6525 Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6526 package should have just one group; a more complex package should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6527 have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6528 package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6529 first-level subgroups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6530
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6531 ** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6532
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6533 This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6534 separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6535
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6536 ** easy-mmode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6537
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6538 The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6539 developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6540 only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6541 predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6542 `easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6543 `easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6545 ** Text property changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6546
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6547 *** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6548 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6549
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6550 *** The new functions next-char-property-change and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6551 previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6552 place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6553 functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6554 starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6556 If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6557 LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6558 of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6559 position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6560
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6561 *** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6562 value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6563 is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6564
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6565 ** Changes in invisibility features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6567 *** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6568 hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6569 is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6570 should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6571 would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6572 make the overlay visible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6574 During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6575 invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6576 needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6577 which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6578 the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6579 t when it should hide it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6580
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6581 *** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6583 Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6584 invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6585 and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6586 Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6587 manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6588 Here is an example of how to do this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6589
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6590 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6591 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6592 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6593 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6594
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6595 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6596 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6597
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6598 ...
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6599 ;; When done with the overlays:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6600 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6601 ;; Or respectively:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6602 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6603
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6604 ** Changes in syntax parsing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6605
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6606 *** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6607 `parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6608 obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6609 `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6610
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6611 If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6612 is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6613 used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6614
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6615 When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6616 character in the buffer is calculated thus:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6617
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6618 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6619 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6621 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6622 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6623 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6625 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6626 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6627 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6628 determine the syntax type of the character.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6630 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6631 of the current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6632
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6633 *** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6634 value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6635 for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6636
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6637 *** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6638 and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6639 only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6640 character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6641 another character with the same code (unless quoted).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6642
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6643 These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6644 text property.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6645
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6646 *** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6647 arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6648 of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6649
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6650 *** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6651 (and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6652 element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6653 nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6654 string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6655
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6656 *** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6657 syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6658 `font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6659
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6660 ** Changes in face features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6661
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6662 *** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6663 if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6665 *** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6666 of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6668 *** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6669 set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6670
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6671 *** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6672 set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6674 *** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6675 by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6676 and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6677 the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6678 overlay property).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6679
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6680 This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6681 arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6682
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6683 ** Changes in file-handling functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6684
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6685 *** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6686 directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6687 they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6688 is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6689
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6690 This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6691 begins with ~.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6692
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6693 *** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6694 it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6696 *** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6697 the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6698
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6699 *** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6700 as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6702 *** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6703 character code conversion as well as other things.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6704
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6705 Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6706 (formerly it did not).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6707
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6708 *** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6709 environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6710
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6711 *** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6712 instead of constant strings.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6714 *** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6715 to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6716 any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6717
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6718 substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6719 in the same way as before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6720
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6721 *** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6722 The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6723 which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6724
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6725 *** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6726 error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6727 else, and returns nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6728
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6729 *** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6730 directory cannot be listed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6731
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6732 ** Changes in minibuffer input
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6733
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6734 *** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6735 read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6736 additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6737 argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6738 ways:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6739
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6740 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6741 It is available through the history command M-n.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6742
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6743 *** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6744 read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6745 argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6746 minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6747 enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6748
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6749 In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6750 argument in this way.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6751
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6752 *** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6753 from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6754 minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6755
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6756 ** Echo area features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6757
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6758 *** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6759 echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6760 minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6761 after the echo area is cleared.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6762
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6763 *** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6764 in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6765
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6766 ** Keyboard input features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6767
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6768 *** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6769 set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6770
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6771 *** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6772 received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6773 by keyboard macros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6774
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6775 ** Frame-related changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6776
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6777 *** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6778 creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6779 hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6780
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6781 *** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6782 the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6783 has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6784
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6785 *** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6786 selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6787 value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6788 in the selected frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6789
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6790 *** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6791 is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6792 which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6793
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6794 ** X Windows features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6795
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6796 *** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6797 x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6798 x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6799
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6800 *** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6801 The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6802
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6803 *** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6804 MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6805 A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6806
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6807 If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6808 it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6809
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6810 ** Subprocess features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6811
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6812 *** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6813 functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6814 automatically.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6815
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6816 *** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6817 and returns the output from the command as a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6818
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6819 *** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6820 and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6821
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6822 ** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6823 does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6824
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6825 ** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6826 at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6827 goes after the other menu items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6828
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6829 ** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6830 of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6831 around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6832 are in use.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6833
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6834 The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6835 series of several changes--if that seems safe.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6836
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6837 Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6838 after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6839 form.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6840
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6841 ** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6842 is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6843 but its hook is still run.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6844
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6845 ** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6846 for errors that are handled by condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6847
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6848 If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6849 regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6850 useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6851
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6852 This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6853 are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6854 filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6855 warned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6856
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6857 ** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6858 way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6859
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6860 ** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6861 integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6862 functions like display-time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6863
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6864 ** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6865 name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6866
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6867 ** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6868 can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6869 is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6870
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6871 ** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6872 if there is an error in compilation.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6873
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6874 ** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6875 switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6876 argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6877 they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6878
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6879 ** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6880 Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6881 the *scratch* buffer.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6882
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6883 ** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6884 The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6885 where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6886 e.g., in Font Lock mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6887
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6888 ** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6889 and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6890 It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6891
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6892 ** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6893 using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6894 variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6895 and compose-mail-other-frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6896
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6897 ** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6898 can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6899 full name of the specified user will be returned.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6900
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6901 ** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6902 of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6903 where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6904 in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6905 option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6906 files at all.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6907
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6908 ** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6909 and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6910 width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6911 the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6912
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6913 For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6914 minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6915 with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6916 is how %S normally pads to two positions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6917
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6918 ** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6919
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6920 ** imenu.el changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6921
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6922 You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
6923 item from menu created by imenu.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6924
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6925 An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6926 #include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6927 select one of those items.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6928
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6929 * Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6930
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6931 * Changes in Emacs 19.33.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6932
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6933 ** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6934 mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6935
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6936 ** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6937 use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6938 Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6939
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6940 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6941
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6942 ** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6943 To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6944
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6945 ** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6946 conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6947 matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6948 expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6949 word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6950 all caps.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6951
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6952 ** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6953 at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6954
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6955 When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6956 does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6957 as in previous Emacs versions.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6958
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6959 ** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6960 non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6961 time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6962 frames.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6963
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6964 ** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6965 if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6966 This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6967 Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6968 accident.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6969
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6970 ** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6971 keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6972 It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6973 line and then executing the macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6974
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6975 This command is not new, but was never documented before.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6976
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6977 ** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6978 (something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6979 characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6980 characters.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6981
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6982 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6983
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6984 *** Font Lock support modes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6985
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6986 Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6987 below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6988 hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6989 to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6990 Font Lock mode is enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6991
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6992 For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6993
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6994 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6995
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6996 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6997
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6998 *** lazy-lock
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
6999
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7000 The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7001 only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7002 becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7003 Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7004 occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7005 buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7006 Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7007
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7008 To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7009
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7010 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7011
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7012 To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7013
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7014 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7015
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7016 *** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7017 paren and key.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7018
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7019 *** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7020 supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7021
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7022 ** Gnus changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7023
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7024 Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7025 commands and variables have been added. There should be no
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7026 significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7027 previously released version, except in the message composition area.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7028
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7029 Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7030 between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7031
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7032 *** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7033 variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7034 obsolete.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7035
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7036 *** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7037 missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7038
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7039 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7040
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7041 *** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7042
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7043 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7044
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7045 *** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7046 referred.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7047
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7048 *** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7049
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7050 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7051
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7052 *** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7053
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7054 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7055
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7056 *** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7057 buffers.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7058
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7059 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7060
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7061 *** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7062
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7063 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7064
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7065 *** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7066
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7067 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7068
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7069 *** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7070
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7071 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7072
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7073 *** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7074 is possible.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7075
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7076 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7077
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7078 *** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7079 groups of groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7080
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7081 *** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7082
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7083 *** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7084 batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7085
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7086 *** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7087
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7088 *** The Gnus cache is much faster.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7089
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7090 *** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7091
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7092 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7093
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7094 *** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7095 expiration times.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7096
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7097 *** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7098
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7099 *** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7100 process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7101
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7102 *** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7103 articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7104 bound to keys on the `/' submap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7105
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7106 *** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7107 articles with the `*' command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7108
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7109 *** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7110
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7111 *** Article headers can be buttonized.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7112
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7113 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7114
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7115 *** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7116
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7117 *** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7118 `nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7119
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7120 *** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7121 buffer.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7122
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7123 *** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7124
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7125 *** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7126
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7127 *** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7128
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7129 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7130
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7131 *** Groups can be made permanently visible.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7132
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7133 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7134
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7135 *** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7136
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7137 *** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7138
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7139 *** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7140
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7141 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7142 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7143
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7144 *** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7145 refetching.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7146
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7147 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7148
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7149 *** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7150 buffer to allow easier treatment.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7151
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7152 *** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7153
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7154 *** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7155
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7156 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7157
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7158 *** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7159 articles.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7160
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7161 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7162
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7163 *** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7164
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7165 *** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7166 cited text to hide is now customizable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7167
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7168 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7169
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7170 *** Boring headers can be hidden.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7171
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7172 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7173
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7174 *** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7175
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7176 *** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7177
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7178 The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7179 in greater detail.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7180
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7181 * Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7182
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7183 ** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7184 second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7185 asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7186 exists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7187
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7188 ** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7189 as well as lists.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7190
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7191 ** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7192 of a given keymap.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7193
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7194 ** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7195 given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7196 keymap or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7197
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7198 ** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7199 an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7200 name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7201 menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7202 equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7203 alias.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7204
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7205 * Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7206
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7207 ** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7208
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7209 Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7210 This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7211 was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7212 far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7213 pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7214
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7215 For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7216 you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7217 `http://www.vtw.org/'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7218
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7219 ** A note about C mode indentation customization.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7220
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7221 The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7222 do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7223 It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7224 much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7225 chapter of the manual for details.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7226
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7227 However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7228 customization variables take effect.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7229
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7230 ** Marking with the mouse.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7231
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7232 When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7233 highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7234 using M-x transient-mark-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7235
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7236 ** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7237
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7238 *** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7239
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7240 *** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7241 to work on NT only and not on 95.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7242
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7243 *** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7244 in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7245 you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7246 application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7247 applications, these problems are significant.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7248
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7249 If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7250 likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7251 However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7252 will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7253 other DOS application as a subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7254
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7255 Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7256 You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7257
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7258 If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7259 subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7260 have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7261 Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7262 separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7263 Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7264
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7265 ** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7266
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7267 This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7268 which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7269 minibuffer contains.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7270
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7271 ** `title' frame parameter and resource.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7272
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7273 The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7274 It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7275 It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7276 affects just the displayed title of the frame.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7277
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7278 The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7279 it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7280 and also serves as the default for the displayed title
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7281 when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7282
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7283 ** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7284 enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7285
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7286 ** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7287 F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7288 Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7289
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7290 If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7291 menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7292 something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7293 the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7294
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7295 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7296
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7297 ** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7298 to replace the characters it "deletes".
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7299
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7300 ** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7301
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7302 ** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7303 a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7304 select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7305 It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7306 immediately after the selected one.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7307
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7308 This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7309 made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7310
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7311 ** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7312
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7313 Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7314 directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7315 If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7316 Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7317 recover-session.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7318
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7319 You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7320 auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7321 will not work.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7322
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7323 Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7324 normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7325 this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7326 bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7327 now that the bug is fixed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7328
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7329 ** Changes to Version Control (VC)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7330
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7331 There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7332 when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7333 Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7334 which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7335
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7336 If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7337 telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7338 VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7339 the link is visited and a warning displayed.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7340
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7341 ** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7342 Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7343 is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7344
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7345 There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7346 Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7347 enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7348 The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7349 remain normal.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7350
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7351 ** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7352 header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7353
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7354 Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7355 known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7356 offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7357 Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7358
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7359 Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7360 of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7361 a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7362 name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7363 documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7364 `mail-directory-stream'.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7365
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7366 ** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7367 skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7368 characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7369 with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7370
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7371 Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7372 - to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7373 wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7374
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7375 The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7376 less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7377 headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7378 Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7379 Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7380 fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7381 to a limitation in font-lock).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7382
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7383 External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7384
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7385 ** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7386 buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7387 buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7388 this example:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7389
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7390 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7391 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7392
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7393 ** Changes in BibTeX mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7394
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7395 *** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7396
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7397 *** Font Lock mode is now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7398
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7399 *** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7400
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7401 *** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7402 entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7403 will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7404 isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7405 (bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7406 The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7407
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7408 *** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7409 does the same job.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7410
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7411 *** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7412 "Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7413
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7414 *** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7415 text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7416
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7417 ** Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7418
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7419 *** Global Font Lock mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7420
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7421 Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7422 new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7423 font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7424 turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7425 on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7426
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7427 For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7428
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7429 (global-font-lock-mode t)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7430
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7431 in your ~/.emacs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7432
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7433 *** Local Refontification
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7434
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7435 In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7436 However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7437 those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7438 command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7439
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7440 In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7441 (The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7442 current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7443 above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7444
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7445 With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7446
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7447 ** Follow mode
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7448
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7449 Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7450 buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7451 side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7452 they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7453 split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7454 follow-mode.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7455
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7456 M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7457
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7458 To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7459 command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7460
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7461 ** hide-show changes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7462
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7463 The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7464 to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7465 normal hooks.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7466
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7467 ** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7468 The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7469
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7470 ** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7471 recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7472 those that begin a function, record, or macro.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7473
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7474 ** MSDOS Changes
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7475
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7476 *** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7477 Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7478
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7479 *** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7480 and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7481
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7482 *** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7483
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7484 *** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7485 pressing both mouse buttons.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7486
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7487 *** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7488 restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
26264
Francesco Potortì <pot@gnu.org>
parents: 26171
diff changeset
7489 are:
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7490
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7491 **** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7492 now works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7493
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7494 **** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7495
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7496 **** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7497 implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7498
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7499 **** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7500
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7501 **** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7502
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7503 **** `M-x recover-session' works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7504
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7505 **** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7506
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7507 **** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7508
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7509 * Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7510
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7511 ** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7512 tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7513 remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7514 this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7515 behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7516
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7517 ** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7518
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7519 The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7520 not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7521 need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7522 be different.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7523
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7524 It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7525 than `system-type'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7526
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7527 See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7528
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7529 ** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7530 now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7531
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7532 ** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7533 that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7534
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7535 ** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7536 no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7537 reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7538
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7539 The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7540 to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7541 like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7542
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7543 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7544
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7545 SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7546 It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7547 becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7548
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7549 REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7550 seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7551 means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7552
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7553 *** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7554 up if too much time passes.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7555
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7556 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7557
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7558 This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7559 If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7560 of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7561 form in BODY.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7562
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7563 *** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7564 a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7565 call looks like this:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7566
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7567 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7568
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7569 SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7570 runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7571 timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7572 ARGS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7573
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7574 Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7575 command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7576 command.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7577
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7578 REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7579 time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7580 does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7581 each time Emacs becomes idle.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7582
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7583 If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7584 idle for SECS seconds.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7585
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7586 *** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7587 all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7588 programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7589 instead.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7590
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7591 *** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7592 there is no answer within a certain time.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7593
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7594 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7595
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7596 asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7597 within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7598 Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7599
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7600 ** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7601 arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7602 meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7603 arguments in between are ignored.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7604
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7605 This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7606 the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7607
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7608 ** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7609 /usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7610 /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7611 site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7612 version.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7613
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7614 It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7615 version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7616 for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7617 has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7618 and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7619 problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7620
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7621 ** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7622 .abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7623 systems with limited file name syntax.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7624
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7625 Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7626 convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7627 for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7628 completions.el:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7629
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7630 (defvar save-completions-file-name
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7631 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7632 "*The filename to save completions to.")
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7633
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7634 This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7635 depends on the operating system, because the definition of
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7636 convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7637 Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7638 MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7639
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7640 ** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7641 rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7642 minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7643
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7644 ** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7645 marker from its buffer position.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7646
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7647 ** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7648 Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7649 The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7650
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7651 ** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7652 that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7653 condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7654 of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7655 matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7656 regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7657
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7658 This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7659 errors that happen often during editing.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7660
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7661 ** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7662 into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7663 puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7664
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7665 ** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7666 now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7667
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7668 ** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7669 a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7670 name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7671 to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7672 and not get-buffer-window.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7673
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7674 ** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7675 calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7676 being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7677
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7678 If you use this feature, you should set the variable
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7679 buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7680 property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7681 non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7682 are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7683 property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7684 over and over for the same text.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7685
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7686 ** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7687
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7688 *** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7689 in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7690
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7691 ;; @(#) HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7692 ;; $HEADER: text $
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7693
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7694 in addition to the normal
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7695
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7696 ;; HEADER: text
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7697
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7698 *** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7699 checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7700 lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7701
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7702 * For older news, see the file ONEWS.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7703
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7704 ----------------------------------------------------------------------
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7705 Copyright information:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7706
27200
37827755f5d3 Up date.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents: 27148
diff changeset
7707 Copyright (C) 1996, 1997, 1998, 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
25853
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7708
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7709 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7710 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7711 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7712 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7713
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7714 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7715 of this document, or of portions of it,
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7716 under the above conditions, provided also that they
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7717 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7718
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7719 Local variables:
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7720 mode: outline
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7721 paragraph-separate: "[ ]*$"
Dave Love <fx@gnu.org>
parents:
diff changeset
7722 end: